Sei sulla pagina 1di 341

CSC-211

Multifunction Protection IED


Technical Application Manual
CSC-211 Multifunction
Protection IED
Technical Application Manual

Compiled: Jin Rui

Checked: Hou Changsong

Standardized: Li Lianchang

Inspected: Cui Chenfan

Version V1.01
Doc.Code0SF.451.085(E)

Issued Date2012.8.31
VersionV1.01
Doc. Code: 0SF.451.085(E)
Issued Date2012.8
Copyright owner: Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd

Note: the company keeps the right to perfect the instruction. If equipment does not agree with
the instruction at anywhere, please contact our company in time. We will provide you with
corresponding service.


is registered trademark of Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.

We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is issued and a different
commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper use, in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties, is not permitted.

This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless detects any errors, he is
asked to notify us as soon as possible.

The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the IED description and is not to be
deemed to be a statement of guaranteed properties. In the interests of our customers, we
constantly seek to ensure that our products are developed to the latest technological standards
as a result it is possible that there may be some differences between the hardware/software
product and this information product.

Manufacturer:
Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.

Tel: +86 10 62962554, +86 10 62961515 ext. 8998


Fax: +86 10 82783625
Email: sf_sales@sf-auto.com
Website: http://www.sf-auto.com
Add: No.9, Shangdi 4th Street, Haidian District, Beijing, P.R.C.100085
Preface
Purpose of this manual

This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into
service of IED CSC-211. In particular, one will find:

Information on how to configure the IED scope and a description of the


IED functions and setting options;

Instructions for mounting and commissioning;

Compilation of the technical specifications;

A compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the


Appendix.

Target audience
This manual mainly face to installation engineer, commissioning engineer and
operation engineer with perfessional electric and electrical knowledge, rich
experience in protection function, using protection IED, test IED, responsible
for the installation, commissioning, maintenance and taking the protection
IED in and out of normal service.

Applicability of this manual


This manual is valid for CSC-211 multifunction protection IED.

Technical support
In case of further questions concerning the CSC family, please contact
SiFang compay or your local SiFang representative.

Safety information

Strictly follow the company and international safety regulations.


Working in a high voltage environment requires serious approch to
aviod human injuries and damage to equipment

Do not touch any circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal


voltages and currents are present

Avoid to touching the circuitry when covers are removed. The IED
contains electirc circuits which can be damaged if exposed to static
electricity. Lethal high voltage circuits are also exposed when covers
are removed

Using the isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present

Never connect or disconnect wire and/or linker to or from IED during


normal operation. Dangerous voltages and currents are present.
Operation may be interrupted and IED and measuring circuitry may
be damaged

Always connect the IED to protective earth regardless of the


operating conditions. Operating the IED without proper earthing may
damage both IED and measuring circuitry and may cause injuries in
case of an accident.

Do not disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer


without short-circuiting the transformers secondary winding.
Operating a current transformer with the secondary winding open will
cause a high voltage that may damage the transformer and may
cause injuries to humans.

Do not remove the screw from a powered IED or from an IED


connected to power circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents
are present

Using the certified conductive bags to transport PCBs (modules).


Handling modules with a conductive wrist strap connected to
protective earth and on an antistatic surface. Electrostatic discharge
may cause damage to the module due to electronic circuits are
sensitive to this phenomenon
Do not connect live wires to the IED, internal circuitry may be
damaged

When replacing modules using a conductive wrist strap connected to


protective earth. Electrostatic discharge may damage the modules
and IED circuitry

When installing and commissioning, take care to avoid electrical


shock if accessing wiring and connection IEDs

Changing the setting value group will inevitably change the IEDs
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the
change
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 1
1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 3
3 Functions..................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 Protection functions ..................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Control functions .......................................................................................................... 6
3.3 Monitoring functions ..................................................................................................... 6
3.4 Station communication ................................................................................................ 6
3.5 IED software tools ........................................................................................................ 7
Chapter 2 General IED application ............................................................................................... 9
1 Display on LCD screen ............................................................................................................. 10
1.1 LCD screen display function ...................................................................................... 10
1.2 Analog display function .............................................................................................. 10
1.3 Report display function .............................................................................................. 10
1.4 Menu dispaly function ................................................................................................ 10
2 Report record ............................................................................................................................ 11
3 Disturbance recorder ................................................................................................................ 12
3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 12
3.2 Fault recording ........................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Wave recording .......................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Sequence of event record.......................................................................................... 13
3.5 Operation record ........................................................................................................ 13
4 Self-supervision function ........................................................................................................... 14
4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 14
4.2 Self-supervision principle ........................................................................................... 14
4.3 Self-supervision report ............................................................................................... 14
5 Time synchroniation function .................................................................................................... 16
5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 16
5.2 Synchronization principle ........................................................................................... 16
5.2.1 Synchronization from IRIG......................................................................................... 17
5.2.2 Synchronization via PPS or PPM .............................................................................. 17
5.2.3 Synchronization via SNTP ......................................................................................... 17
6 Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 18
6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 18
6.2 Operation principle ..................................................................................................... 18
7 Authorization ............................................................................................................................. 19
7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 19
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection ............................................................................................... 21
1 Overcurrent protection .............................................................................................................. 22
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 22
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 22
1.2.1 Time characteristics ........................................................................................... 22
1.2.2 Inrush restraint function ..................................................................................... 24
1.2.3 Low voltage component ..................................................................................... 24
1.2.4 Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 25
1.2.5 Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 26
1.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 28
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 29
1.4.1 Setting list........................................................................................................... 29
1.5 Reports ...................................................................................................................... 30
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 31
Approx. 0.95 at I/In 0.5 ................................................................................................... 31
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection ................................................................................................. 33
1 Earth fault protection ................................................................................................................. 34
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 34
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 35
1.2.1 Time characteristic ............................................................................................. 35
1.2.2 Inrush restraint ................................................................................................... 36
1.2.3 Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 37
1.2.4 Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 39
1.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 41
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 42
1.4.1 Setting list........................................................................................................... 42
1.5 IED reports................................................................................................................. 44
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 44
Approx. 0.95 at I/Ir 0.5 .................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection .................................................................................. 47
1 Sensitive overcurrent protection ............................................................................................... 48
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 48
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 48
1.2.1 Time characteristic ............................................................................................. 48
1.2.2 Direction determination feature .......................................................................... 49
1.2.3 Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 52
1.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 53
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 54
1.4.1 Setting list........................................................................................................... 54
1.5 IED reports................................................................................................................. 56
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............................................................... 59
1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection ............................................................................... 60
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 60
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 60
1.2.1 Protection function description ........................................................................... 60
1.2.2 Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 61
1.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 62
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 62
1.4.1 Setting list ........................................................................................................... 63
1.5 IED reports ................................................................................................................. 64
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 64
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection ...................................................................................... 67
1 Thermal overload protection ..................................................................................................... 68
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 68
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 68
1.2.1 Function description ........................................................................................... 68
1.3 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 70
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 70
1.4.1 Setting list ........................................................................................................... 70
1.5 IED reports ................................................................................................................. 71
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 71
Chapter 8 Current overload protection ....................................................................................... 73
1 Current overload protection ...................................................................................................... 74
1.1 Function description ................................................................................................... 74
1.1.1 Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 74
1.2 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 74
1.3 Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 75
1.3.1 Setting list ........................................................................................................... 75
1.4 IED reports ................................................................................................................. 75
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection ............................................................................................... 77
1 Overvoltage protection .............................................................................................................. 78
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 78
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 78
1.2.1 Overvoltage protection principle ........................................................................ 78
1.2.2 Voltage connection ............................................................................................. 79
1.2.3 Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 80
1.3 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 81
1.4 Setting parameters .................................................................................................... 81
1.4.1 Setting list ........................................................................................................... 81
1.5 IED reports ................................................................................................................. 82
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 83
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection............................................................................................. 85
1 Undervoltage protection ............................................................................................................ 86
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 86
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 86
1.2.1 Protection function description ........................................................................... 86
1.2.2 Voltage connection ............................................................................................. 87
1.2.3 Depending on the VT location ............................................................................ 88
1.2.4 Logic diagram ..................................................................................................... 89
1.3 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 91
1.4 Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 92
1.4.1 Setting list........................................................................................................... 92
1.5 IED reports................................................................................................................. 93
1.6 Technical data ........................................................................................................... 93
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection ............................................................................... 95
1 Displacement voltage protection............................................................................................... 96
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 96
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................... 96
1.2.1 Displacement voltage input ................................................................................ 96
1.2.2 Protection description ........................................................................................ 96
1.2.3 Logic diagram..................................................................................................... 97
1.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 98
1.4 Setting parameter ...................................................................................................... 99
1.4.1 Setting list........................................................................................................... 99
1.5 IED reports............................................................................................................... 100
1.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 100
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection.............................................................................. 103
1 Circuit breaker failure protection ............................................................................................. 104
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 104
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 104
1.2.1 Protection description ...................................................................................... 104
1.2.2 Current criterion evaluation .............................................................................. 105
1.2.3 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation ..................................................... 105
1.2.4 Logic diagram................................................................................................... 106
1.3 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 107
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 108
1.4.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 108
1.5 IED reports............................................................................................................... 108
1.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 109
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection ............................................................................................... 111
1 Dead zone protection ...............................................................................................................112
1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................112
1.2 Protection principle ...................................................................................................112
1.2.1 Function description ..........................................................................................112
1.2.2 Logic diagram....................................................................................................114
1.3 Input and output signals ...........................................................................................114
1.4 Setting parameter .....................................................................................................115
1.4.1 Setting list..........................................................................................................115
1.5 IED reports................................................................................................................116
1.6 Technical data ..........................................................................................................116
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and energizing check function .........................................................117
1 Synchro-check and energizing check function ........................................................................118
1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................118
1.2 Function principle .....................................................................................................118
1.2.1 Synchro-check mode ........................................................................................119
1.2.2 Energizing check mode .................................................................................... 120
1.2.3 Override mode ................................................................................................. 121
1.2.4 Logic diagram ................................................................................................... 121
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 122
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 123
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 123
1.5 IED reports ............................................................................................................... 124
1.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 125
Chapter 15 Autoreclosing function ............................................................................................. 127
1 Autoreclosing function ............................................................................................................. 128
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 128
1.2 Function principle ..................................................................................................... 128
1.2.1 Auto-reclosing initiation modules ..................................................................... 128
1.2.2 Autoreclosing logic ........................................................................................... 129
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 132
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 134
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 134
1.5 IED reports ............................................................................................................... 136
1.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 137
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection ............................................................................................... 139
1 Unbalance protection .............................................................................................................. 140
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 140
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 140
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 146
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 147
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 147
1.5 IED reports ............................................................................................................... 147
Chapter 17 Under current monitoring ......................................................................................... 149
1 Under current monitoring ........................................................................................................ 150
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 150
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 150
1.2.1 Function description ......................................................................................... 150
1.2.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................... 150
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 151
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 151
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 151
1.5 IED reports ............................................................................................................... 152
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection ........................................................................................ 153
1 Low frequency load shedding protection ................................................................................ 154
1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 154
1.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 154
1.2.1 Function description ......................................................................................... 154
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 155
1.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 156
1.4.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 156
1.5 IED reports............................................................................................................... 157
2 Low voltage load shedding protection .................................................................................... 158
2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 158
2.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 158
2.2.1 Funciton description ......................................................................................... 158
2.3 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 159
2.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 160
2.4.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 160
2.5 IED reports............................................................................................................... 161
3 Overload load shedding protection ......................................................................................... 162
3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 162
3.2 Protection principle .................................................................................................. 162
3.2.1 Fucntion description ......................................................................................... 162
3.3 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 163
3.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 164
3.4.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 164
3.5 IED reports............................................................................................................... 164
3.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 165
Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme ............................................................................... 167
1 Fast busbar protection scheme .............................................................................................. 168
1.1 Function description ................................................................................................ 168
1.2 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 169
1.3 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 170
1.3.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 170
1.4 IED reports............................................................................................................... 170
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision ................................................................................ 171
1 Current circuit supervision ...................................................................................................... 172
1.1 Function principle .................................................................................................... 172
1.1.1 Function description ......................................................................................... 172
1.1.2 Logic diagram................................................................................................... 172
1.2 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 172
1.3 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 173
1.3.1 Setting list......................................................................................................... 173
1.4 IED reports............................................................................................................... 173
2 Fuse failure supervision VT .................................................................................................... 174
2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 174
2.2 Function principle .................................................................................................... 174
2.2.1 Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail ................................................................ 174
2.2.2 Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail ....................................................... 175
2.2.3 The fourth voltage U4 VT fail ........................................................................... 175
2.2.4 Logic diagram................................................................................................... 175
2.3 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 177
2.4 Setting parameter .................................................................................................... 177
2.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 177
2.5 IED reports ............................................................................................................... 178
2.6 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 178
Chapter 21 Monitoring function .................................................................................................. 181
1 Switching devices status monitoring ....................................................................................... 182
2 Self-supervision ...................................................................................................................... 182
Chapter 22 Station communication ............................................................................................ 183
1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 184
1.1 Protocol .................................................................................................................... 184
1.1.1 IEC61850-8 communication protocol ............................................................... 184
1.1.2 IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................................ 184
1.2 Communication port ................................................................................................. 185
1.2.1 Front communication port ................................................................................ 185
1.2.2 RS485 communication ports ............................................................................ 185
1.2.3 Ethernet communication ports ......................................................................... 185
1.3 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 185
1.4 Typical substation communication scheme ............................................................. 188
1.5 Typical time synchronizing scheme ......................................................................... 188
Chapter 23 Hardware ................................................................................................................. 189
1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 190
1.1 IED structure ............................................................................................................ 190
1.2 IED module arrangement......................................................................................... 190
2 Local human-machine interface .............................................................................................. 192
2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 192
2.2 Liquid crystal display (LCD) ..................................................................................... 192
2.3 LED .......................................................................................................................... 193
2.4 Keyboard ................................................................................................................. 193
2.5 IED menu ................................................................................................................. 194
2.5.1 Menu construction ............................................................................................ 194
2.5.2 Operation status ............................................................................................... 196
2.5.3 Operation status ............................................................................................... 197
2.5.4 Operation configuration .................................................................................... 197
2.5.5 Settings ............................................................................................................ 197
2.5.6 Report............................................................................................................... 197
2.5.7 Communication configuration .......................................................................... 198
2.5.8 Testing .............................................................................................................. 198
2.5.9 Device setup .................................................................................................... 199
2.5.10 Device information ........................................................................................... 200
3 Analog input module ............................................................................................................... 201
3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 201
3.2 Terminals of analog input module ........................................................................... 202
3.3 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 206
4 Fast binary Input & Output module ......................................................................................... 208
4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 208
4.2 Terminals of fast binary input & output module ....................................................... 208
4.3 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 210
5 Fast binary output module ...................................................................................................... 212
5.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 212
5.2 Terminals of fast binary output module ................................................................... 212
6 Binary input & output module .................................................................................................. 214
6.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 214
6.2 Terminals of binary & output module ....................................................................... 214
7 CPU module............................................................................................................................ 217
7.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 217
7.2 Terminals of CPU module ....................................................................................... 217
7.3 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 219
8 Power supply module ............................................................................................................. 221
8.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 221
8.2 Terminals of power supply module .......................................................................... 221
8.3 Technical data ......................................................................................................... 223
9 Technical data ......................................................................................................................... 224
9.1 Type tests ................................................................................................................ 224
9.2 IED design ............................................................................................................... 227
9.3 CE certificate ........................................................................................................... 228
Chapter 24 Appendix .................................................................................................................. 229
1 General setting list .................................................................................................................. 230
1.1 Setting list for CSC-211 M01 ................................................................................... 230
1.2 Setting list for CSC-211 M02 ................................................................................... 237
1.3 Setting list for CSC-211 M03 ................................................................................... 244
1.4 Setting list for CSC-211 M05 ................................................................................... 250
1.5 Setting list for CSC-211 M6 ..................................................................................... 255
1.6 Setting list for CSC-211 V01.................................................................................... 259
1.7 Setting list for CSC-211 C01 ................................................................................... 262
1.8 Setting list for CSC-211 C02 ................................................................................... 268
2 General report list ................................................................................................................... 275
2.1 Event report list ........................................................................................................ 275
2.2 Alarm report list ....................................................................................................... 277
3 Typical connection .................................................................................................................. 282
4 Time inverse characteristic ..................................................................................................... 304
4.1 11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves ................................. 304
4.2 User defined characteristic ...................................................................................... 304
4.3 Typical inverse curves ............................................................................................. 305
5 CT Requirement...................................................................................................................... 317
5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 317
5.2 Current transformer classification ............................................................................ 318
5.3 Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as defined) ...................................... 319
5.4 General current transformer requirements .............................................................. 320
5.4.1 Protective checking current.............................................................................. 320
5.4.2 CT class ........................................................................................................... 320
5.4.3 Accuracy class ................................................................................................. 322
5.4.4 Ratio of CT ....................................................................................................... 322
5.4.5 Rated secondary current .................................................................................. 323
5.4.6 Secondary burden ............................................................................................ 323
5.5 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements ..................................................... 323
5.5.1 Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection ........................ 324
5.5.2 Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection ........................ 325
Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

About this chapter

This chapter gives an overview of SIFANG Multifunction


Protection IED CSC-211.

1
Chapter 1 Introduction

1 Overview
CSC-211 series are selective, reliable and high speed multifunction
protection IED (Intelligent Electronic Device), which are able to be applied
for protection, control and measurement for following applications:

Applicable in subtransmission network and distribution network with


solidly earthed (grounded), low-resistance earthed, isolated or
compensated neutral point

Protection of feeders, capacitors, distribution transformers, bus


coupler, etc.

Used as backup protection IED for lines, transformers, reactors and


busbar

Providing control and monitoring functions of the circuit breakers,


disconnector, etc.

Supporting all functionalities required for automation system

2
Chapter 1 Introduction

2 Features
Extensive multifunction IED including protection, control and
monitoring functions

Three pole tripping required in sub-transmission and distribution


network

A complete protection functions library, include:

Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 67)

Earth fault protection (50N, 51N, 67N)

Neutral earth fault protection (50G, 51G)

Sensitive earth fault protection (50Ns, 51Ns, 67Ns)

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection (46)

Thermal overload protection (49)

Overload protection (50OL)

Overvoltage protection (59)

Undervoltage protection (27)

Displacement voltage protection (64)

Circuit breaker failure protection (50BF)

Dead zone protection (50SH-Z)

Synchro-check and energizing check (25)

Auto-recloser function for three-phase reclosing (79)

Unbalanced current or voltage protection

Undercurrent protection (37)

load shedding function

3
Chapter 1 Introduction

Voltage transformer secondary circuit supervision (97FF)

Current transformer secondary circuit supervision

Fast overcurrent/busbar protection scheme using IEC61850


GOOSE-message

CB status supervision

Self-supervision to all modules in the IED

Complete and massive reports recording, trip reports, alarm reports,


startup reports and operation reports. Any kinds of reports can be
stored no less than 40 items, and be memorized in case of power
disconnection

Up to two electric /optical Ethernet ports can be selected to


communicate with substation automation system by IEC61850 or
IEC60870-5-103 protocols

One electric RS-485 port is able to communicate with substation


automation system by IEC60870-5-103 protocol

Time synchronization via network(SNTP), pulse and IRIG-B mode

Versatile human-machine interface

Multifunctional software tool CSmart for setting, monitoring, fault


recording analysis, configuration, etc.

4
Chapter 1 Introduction

3 Functions

3.1 Protection functions

IEC 61850 IEC 60617


Description ANSI Code Logical Node graphical
Name symbol
Current protection
3IINV>
Overcurrent protection 50,51,67 PTOC 3I >>
3I >>>
I0INV>
Earth fault protection 50N, 51N, 67N PEFM I0>>
I0>>>
Neutral earth fault protection 50G, 51G
50Ns, 51Ns, 3INE>
Sensitive earth fault protection
67Ns 3INE>>
Negative-sequence overcurrent
46
protection
Thermal overload protection 49 PTTR Ith

Overload protection 50OL PTOC 3I >OL

Voltage protection
3U>
Overvoltage protection 59 PTOV
3U>>
3U<
Undervoltage protection 27 PTUV
3U<<
Displacement voltage protection 64 VE>

Breaker protection and control function


3I> BF
Breaker failure protection 50BF RBRF I0>BF
I2>BF
Dead zone protection 50SH-Z

Synchro-check and energizing check 25 RSYN

Auto-reclosing 79 RREC OI

Three-pole tripping 94-3 PTRC

Capacitor bank protection

Unbalanced current protection 46NI


5
Chapter 1 Introduction

Unbalanced voltage protection 46NU

Undercurrent protection 37 I<

Load shedding function

Low frequency load shedding function 81U

Low voltage load shedding function 27

Overload load shedding function

Secondary system supervision

CT secondary circuit supervision

VT secondary circuit supervision 97FF

Other functions
Fast busbar protection using reverse
interlocking

3.2 Control functions

IEC 61850 IEC 60617


Description ANSI Code Logical Node graphical
Name symbol
Circuit breaker, disconnector and
other switching devices control

3.3 Monitoring functions

Description

Position of circuit breaker, disconnector and other switching device monitoring

Circuit breaker status supervision

Auxiliary contacts of circuit breaker supervision

Self-supervision

Fault recorder

3.4 Station communication

Description

6
Chapter 1 Introduction

Front communication port

Isolated RS232 port

Rear communication port

0-1 isolated electrical RS485 communication ports

0-2 Ethernet electrical/optical communication ports

Time synchronization port

Communication protocols

IEC 61850 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

3.5 IED software tools

Functions

Reading measuring value

Reading IED report

Setting

IED testing

Disturbance recording analysis

IED configuration

Printing

7
Chapter 1 Introduction

8
Chapter 2 General IED application

Chapter 2 General IED application

About this chapter

This chapter describes the use of the included software


functions in the IED. The chapter discusses general application
possibilities.

9
Chapter 2 General IED application

1 Display on LCD screen

1.1 LCD screen display function

The LCD screen displays measured analog quantities, report ouputs, menu
and logic linker status.

1.2 Analog display function

The analog display includes measured Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0, Is0, Ua, Ub, Uc, U4, Mea
Ia, Mea Ib, Mea Ic, Mea Ua, Mea Ub, Mea Uc, Mea Uab, Mea Ubc and Mea
Uca.

The Mea means that the measurement analogue quantity, for example, Mea
Ia, means the measurement current for phase A.

1.3 Report display function

The report display includes tripping, alarm and operation recording.

1.4 Menu dispaly function

The menu dispaly includes main menu and debugging menu, see chapter
Chapter 23 for detail.

10
Chapter 2 General IED application

2 Report record
The report record includes tripping, alarm and operation reports. See Chapter
24 general report list for detail.

11
Chapter 2 General IED application

3 Disturbance recorder

3.1 Introduction

To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage,
binary signal and other disturbances in the power system is very important.
This is accomplished by the disturbance recorder function and facilitates a
better understanding of the behavior of the power system and related primary
and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the
recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a
disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improvement of existing
equipment etc.

The disturbance recorder, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
from measured analogue quantities, calculated analogue quantity, binary
input and output signals.

3.2 Fault recording

The IED can save the latest 40 fault records (be memorized in case of power
disconnection), which can be read via the IED operation interface or
communication port. The fault record consists of the following information:

Fault time: date and time

Event list: operative element and time

Running data: current, voltage, frequency and phase angle

Operation setting

IED operation mode

3.3 Wave recording

Wave recording function is used to record the analogue data and status with a
pre-defined length after and before disturbance occurs, reshow the operation
track of the protected IED. The recording wave includes at most 12 analogue
channels, 64 binary channels (32 binary input, 16 binary output and 16
GOOSE signal) and time sequence information. IED records the data as the
sample of 20 points in each cycle, accumulated length of each record is up to
12
Chapter 2 General IED application

8 seconds and 20 latest recording waves can be stored. Wave are searched
and called via dedicated software from the RS232 serial port on panel, and be
converted to COMTRADE format for being used by other recording wave
analysis software or fault simulation software.

3.4 Sequence of event record

The IED monitors and records the change of operation event, alarm event,
binary input, binary output and protection linker, records the event occurrence
time, reason and current status, and transfers the information to the station
control center via the communication port.

3.5 Operation record

The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded


disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local human machine
interface or dedicated tool to get some general information about the
recordings. The disturbance recording information is included in the
disturbance recorder files. The information is also available on a station bus
according to IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103.

Fault wave recorder with great capacity, can record full process of any fault,
and can save the corresponding records. Optional data format or wave format
is provided, and can be exported through serial port or Ethernet port by
COMTRADE format.

13
Chapter 2 General IED application

4 Self-supervision function

4.1 Introduction

The IED may test all hardware components itself, including loop out of the
relay coil. Finding whether or not the IED is in fault through warning LED and
warning characters which shown in LCD and display reports to indicate fault
type.

The method of fault elimination is replacing fault board or eliminating external


fault.

4.2 Self-supervision principle

Measuring resistance between analog circuits and ground

Measuring the output voltage in every class

Checking zero drift and scale

Verifying alarm circuit

Verifying binary input

Checking actual live tripping including circuit breaker

Check setting values and parameters

4.3 Self-supervision report

Table 1 Self-supervision report list

Information Description
RAM Error RAM is abnormal
EPROM Error EPROM is abnormal
Flash Error Flash is abnormal
BO Abnormal Binary output is abnormal
AD Error AD is abnormal
Zero Offset Zero drift is out of limitation
Invalid SetGr Pointer of setting group is error

14
Chapter 2 General IED application

Information Description
Setting Chk ERR Setting value is error
Logic Scheme ERR Logic file and CPU file do not cooperate

15
Chapter 2 General IED application

5 Time synchroniation function

5.1 Introduction

Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of


absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes
comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system
possible.

5.2 Synchronization principle

Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and
the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is
normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error increases,
i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that
knows its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical


structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives


synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the
accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can have
16
Chapter 2 General IED application

several potential sources of synchronization, with different maximum errors,


which gives the module the possibility to choose the source with the best
quality, and to adjust its internal clock from this source. The maximum error of
a clock can be defined as a function of:

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message

The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

5.2.1 Synchronization from IRIG

The built in GPS clock module receives and decodes time information from
the global positioning system. The module is located on the CPU Module. The
GPS interfaces to the IED supply two possible synchronization methods,
IRIGB and PPS (or PPM).

5.2.2 Synchronization via PPS or PPM

The IED accepts PPS or PPM to the GPS interfaces on the CPU Module.
These pulses can be generated from e.g. station master clock. If the station
master clock is not synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a
relative time valid for the substation. Both positive and negative edges on the
signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as a fine signal.

5.2.3 Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a Ping-Pong method of synchronization. A message is sent


from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message
after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the
normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850
network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a SNTP-server present,
preferably in the same station. The SNTP synchronization provides an
accuracy that will give 1ms accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be
set as a SNTP-time server.

17
Chapter 2 General IED application

6 Setting

6.1 Introduction

Settings are divided into separate lists according to different functions. The
setting consists of two parts -setting list and communication parameters.

6.2 Operation principle

The setting procedure can be ended at any the time by the key SET or
QUIT. If the key SET is pressed, the display shows the content of Select.
The range of setting zone is from 1 to 16. After confirming with the setting
zone-key SET, those new settings will be valid. If key QUIT is pressed
instead, all modifications which have been changed will be ignored.

18
Chapter 2 General IED application

7 Authorization

7.1 Introduction

To safeguard the interests of customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, subject of authorization handling. The
concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED and the associated
tools is based on the following facts:

There are two types of points of access to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

There are different levels (or types) of guest, super user and protection
engineer that can access or operate different areas of the IED and tools
functionality.

19
Chapter 2 General IED application

20
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes the protection principle, input and


output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for overcurrent protection.

21
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

1 Overcurrent protection

1.1 Introduction

The non-directional overcurrent elements can be applied as backup


protection functions in various applications including line and transformer
protection in systems with radial nature and those which are supplied from
a single source. The directional overcurrent protection allows the
application of the IED also in systems where protection coordination
depends on both the magnitude of the fault current and the direction of
power flow to the fault location, for instance in case of parallel lines or
transformers, or in a loop configuration. Main features of the overcurrent
protection are as follows:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set individually as directional/non-directional

Each stage can be set individually for inrush restraint

Cross blocking function for inrush detection

Settable maximum inrush current

First definite stage and inverse time stage can be set individually to
alarm or trip

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection. Once VT


failure happens, the directional stage can be set to be blocked or to be
non-directional

Undervoltage criteria checking (selectable), blocking of the definite


time stages is possible when the measured voltage exceeds the
threshold

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Time characteristics


22
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage
or some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined
time characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the
integrated inrush restraint and directional functions and operate based on
measured phase current. In addition, an undervoltage control feature is
provided which can be used for definite overcurrent stages.

Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be


combined as desired.

Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. Each phase
current is compared with the corresponding setting value with delay time. If
currents exceed the associated pickup value, after expiry of the time delay,
the trip command or alarm signal is issued. The dropout value of the
definite stages is approximately equal to 96% of the pickup value for I/In
0.5. The condition for delay time starting is expressed in the following
formula:

Equation 1

The delay time can be set for each definite stage individually in setting.
After the delay time elapsed, a trip command or alarm signal is issued.

For the delay time of inverse time characteristic, which is calculated here
based on the type of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current
and a time multiplier, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using
following formula:

K_OC

Equation 2

where:

A_OC: Time factor for inverse time stage

B_OC: Delay time for inverse time stage

P_OC: Index for inverse time stage

23
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

K_OC: Time multiplier

By applying setting of these coefficients, the IED calculates the tripping or


alarming time from the measured current in each phase separately. Once
the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal or alarm signal is
issued.

1.2.2 Inrush restraint function

The protection IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during
transformer energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental
current, inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which
does not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may
affect the protection functions which operate based on the fundamental
component of the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is
provided to prevent overcurrent protection from maloperation.

The inrush restraint feature operates based on evaluation of the 2nd


harmonic content which is present in measured current. The inrush
condition is recognized when the ratio of second harmonic current to
fundamental component exceeds the corresponding setting value for each
phase. The setting value is applicable for both definite time stage and
inverse time stage. The inrush restraint feature will be performed as soon
as the ration exceeds the set threshold.

Furthermore, by recognition of the inrush current in one phase, it is


possible to set the protection in a way that not only the phase with the
considerable inrush current, but also the other phases of the overcurrent
protection are blocked for a certain time. This is achieved by
cross-blocking feature integrated in the IED.

The inrush restraint function has a maximum inrush current setting. Once
the measuring current exceeds the setting, the overcurrent protection will
not be blocked any longer.

1.2.3 Low voltage component

It is possible to set the protection in a way that the definite stages of


overcurrent element would operate only when at least one phase-to-phase
voltage falls below than the corresponding low voltage setting. This
component can be used to prevent any maloperation of the overcurrent
element during reverse charging of electric motors. The low voltage

24
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

component can be set for each definite stage by the dedicated binary
settings.

The voltages connected to IED may correspond to three phase to earth


voltages VA-N, VB-N, VC-N or any phase to earth voltage or phase to
phase voltage by using dedicated binary setting. In case of 3Ph V
Connect is enabled, three phase to phase voltages are measured, or any
one phase to phase voltage should be measured.

1.2.4 Direction determination feature

The direction detection is performed by determining the position of current


vector in directional characteristic. In other word, it is done by comparing
phase angle between the fault current and the reference voltage. Figure 1
illustrates the direction detection characteristic for phase A element.

Forward 90 IA

Bisector

Ph_Char
0
U BC_Ref

-IA

Figure 1 Direction detection characteristic of overcurrent protection directional element

where:
Ph_Char: The settable characteristic angle

The assignment of the applied measuring values used in direction


determination has been shown in Table 2 for different types of faults.

Table 2 Assignment of applied current and reference voltage for directional element

Phase Current Voltage

A Ia U bc
B Ib U ca
25
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

C Ic U ab

As can be seen from Table 2, the healthy voltages are used in direction
determination. This guarantee corrects direction determination even if the
fault voltage has collapsed totally because of a single-phase short-circuit
fault. For three-phase short-circuit fault, without any healthy phase,
memory voltage values are used to determine direction clearly if the
measured voltage values are not sufficient. The detected direction is
based on the memory voltage of previous power cycles.

During direction detection, if VT fail happens (a short circuit or broken wire


in the voltage transformer's secondary circuit or operation of the voltage
transformer fuse), may result in maloperation by directional overcurrent
elements. In such situation, directional (if selected) overcurrent protection
will be blocked.

1.2.5 Logic diagram

Ia2/Ia1 >

Ib2/Ib1 > OR

Ic2/Ic1 > AND Cross BLK

t<

Figure 2 Logic diagram of cross-blocking for inrush restraint

Uab< OC1_V Blk On


LV For OC 1
Ubc< OR
OC2_V Blk On
LV For OC 2
Uca<

Figure 3 Logic diagram of low voltage component feature

26
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Ia >

VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail AND

UnBlk Fun_VTFail OR
1 OR AND DEF A OK
OC1 Dir Off
Phase A Forward
OC1 Dir On
AND
LV For OC I
1
OC1_V Blk On
OC1 Dir Off AND
1
OC1 V_Blk Off 1
OC1 V_Blk Off

0
OC1 2H_Blk Off
< I_2H_UnBlk
AND
Ia2/Ia1> OC1 2H_Blk On

DEF A OK T Func_OC1
AND Trip/Alarm
0
OC1 2H_Blk Off

Cross BLK
OC1 2H_Blk On

Figure 4 Logic diagram of definite overcurrent stage

27
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Ia Inverse

VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail AND

UnBlk Fun_VTFail OR OR AND INV A OK


1
OC Inv Dir Off
Phase A Forward
OC Inv Dir On 1
OC Inv Dir Off

0
OCInv 2H_Blk Off
< I_2H_UnBlk
AND
Ia2/Ia1> OCInv 2H_Blk On

INV A OK Func_OC Inv


AND Trip/Alarm
0
OCInv 2H_Blk Off

Cross BLK
OCInv 2H_Blk On

Figure 5 Logic diagram of inverse overcurrent stage

1.3 Input and output signals

IP1 OC1_Trip
IP2 OC2_Trip
IP3
OC Inv Trip
UP1
UP2
UP3

Table 3 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1
IP2 Signal for current input 2
IP3 Signal for current input 3
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3

28
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Table 4 Binary output list

Signal Description
OC1_Trip Overcurrent protection stage 1 trip
OC2_Trip Overcurrent protection stage 2 trip
OC Inv Trip Overcurrent protection inverse time stage trip

1.4 Setting parameters

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 5 Function setting list for overcurrent protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


1. In I_OC1 Current setting for stage 1 A 0.05In 20.00In
2. 0.4 T_OC1 Time setting for stage 1 S 0.00 60.00
3. 1.5In I_OC2 Current setting for stage 2 A 0.05In 20.00In
4. 0.1 T_OC2 Time setting for stage 2 S 0.00 60.00
Low voltage setting for
5. 90.0 U_OC_UnBlk blocking overcurrent V 1.00 120.0
protection (phase to phase)
6. 1 Curve_OC Inv Inverse time curve 1 12
Current setting for inverse
7. 0.5In I_OC Inv A 0.05In 20.00In
time stage
8. 1 K_OC Inv Time multiplier 0.05 999.0
Time factor for inverse time
9. 0.056 A_OC Inv S 0.001 1000
stage
10. 0.02 P_OC Inv Index for inverse time stage 0.01 10.00
Delay time for inverse time
11. 0 B_OC Inv S 0.00 60.00
stage
12. 30 Angle_OC Direction characteristic angle degree 0.00 90.00
Maximum inrush current
13. In I_2H_UnBlk A 0.25In 20.00In
setting
Ratio for second harmonic
14. 0.15 Ratio_I2/I1 current to fundamental 0.07 0.50
component
Time setting for
15. 0.2 T2h_Cross_Blk S 0.00 60.00
cross-blocking function

Table 6 Logical linker list for overcurrent protection


29
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_OC1 Enable or disable the stage 1 of overcurrent protection
2. Func_OC2 Enable or disable the stage 2 of overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the inverse time stage of overcurrent
3. Func_OC Inv
protection

Table 7 Binary setting list for overcurrent protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Enable or disable the direction for
1.0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
stage 1
Enable or disable the low voltage
1.1 OC1 V_Blk Off OC1_V Blk On
blocking for stage 1
Enable or disable the inrush
1.2 OC1 2H_Blk Off OC1 2H_Blk On
restraint for stage 1
Enable or disable the direction for
1.3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
stage 2
Enable or disable the low voltage
1.4 OC2 V_Blk Off OC2 V_Blk On
blocking for stage 2
Enable or disable the inrush
1.5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
restraint for stage 2
Enable or disable the direction for
1.6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
inverse stage
Enable or disable the inrush
1.7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
restraint for inverse stage
Select voltage connection way by
2.9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
single phase or three phase
Enable the function of VT fail
2.14 UnBlk Fun_VT Fail Blk Fun_VT Fail
blocking
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection
4.0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
alarm or trip
Inverse stage of overcurrent
4.1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
protection alarm or trip

1.5 Reports

Table 8 Event information list

Information Description
OC1 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command
OC2 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command
OC Inv Trip Overcurrent protection inverse time stage issues trip command

30
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Information Description
Inrush Blk Inrush is detected to block function.

Table 9 Alarm information list

Information Description
OC1 Alarm Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues alarm signal
OC Inv Alarm Overcurrent protection inverse time stage issues alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 10 Technical data for overcurrent protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Definite time characteristics

Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir


1% setting or +40ms, at 200%
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
operating setting
Reset time approx. 40ms
Reset ratio Approx. 0.95 at I/In 0.5
Inverse time characteristics

Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir


IEC standard Normal inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse; with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse; accordance with ANSI/IEEE


C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic 5% setting + 40ms, at 2
T=
<I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005
set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01
Minimum operating time 20ms

31
Chapter 3 Overcurrent protection

Maximum operating time 100s


Reset mode instantaneous
Reset time approx. 40ms,
Directional element
Operating area range 170 3, at phase to phase
Characteristic angle 0to 90, step 1 voltage >1V

32
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

About this chapter

This chapter presents the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in earth fault protection.

33
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

1 Earth fault protection

1.1 Introduction

The non-directional earth fault elements can be applied as backup protection


functions in various applications including line and transformer protection in
systems with radial nature and those which are supplied from a single source.
The directional earth fault protection allows the application of the IED also in
systems where protection coordination depends on both the magnitude of the
earth fault current and the direction of power flow to the fault location, for
instance, in case of parallel lines or transformers, or in a loop configuration.
Main features of the earth fault are as follows:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of the IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well
as optional user defined characteristic

Zero sequence directional element

Negative sequence directional element is applied as a complement to


zero sequence directional element. It can be enabled/disabled by setting

Each stage can be set individually as directional/non-directional

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set individually for inrush restraint

Settable maximum inrush current

Inrush restraint function adopting 2nd harmonic measured phase or earth


current (settable)

First definite stage and inverse time stage can be set individually to alarm
or trip

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection function. Once


VT failure happens, the directional stage can be set to be blocked or to
be non-directional
34
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Zero-sequence current is calculated by summation of 3 phase currents or


measured from earth phase CT selectable

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Time characteristic

The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage or
some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined time
characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the integrated
inrush restraint and directional functions and operate based on measured
phase current.

The earth fault protection can operate with the measured or calculated zero
sequence current (zero-sequence current IN measured from earth phase CT
or zero-sequence current 3I0 calculated by the summation of three phase
currents, 3I0=IA+IB+IC). These two types of measured quantity can be enabled
or disabled via binary setting. If setting 3I0 Measured is enabled in the
binary setting, the function will operate based on the measured
zero-sequence current, whereas, the 3I0 Calculated is enabled, the
zero-sequence current is calculated from the summation of three phase
currents.

Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be


combined as desired.

Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. The measured
or calculated zero-sequence current is compared with the corresponding
setting value with delay time. If zero-sequence current exceed the associated
pickup value, after expiry of the time delay, trip command is issued. The
condition for delay time start is expressed in the following formula

Equation 3

The time delay can be set for each definite stage individually in setting. After
the delay time elapsed, trip command or alarm signal is issued. The drop out
value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 96% of the pickup value
for 3I0/In0.5.

35
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_EF

Equation 4

where:

A_EF: Time factor for inverse time stage

B_EF: Delay time for inverse time stage

P_EF: index for inverse time stage

K_EF: Time multiplier

The time is set to count up for a user-defined time delay. The time delay can
be set for each definite stage individually through corresponding settings.
After the user-defined time delays elapsed, a trip command is issued.

1.2.2 Inrush restraint

The protection IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during
transformer energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental
current, inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which does
not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may affect the
protection functions which operate based on the fundamental component of
the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is provided to
prevent earth fault protection from maloperation.

Generally, inrush restraint for earth fault protection is performed based on the
second harmonic contents of three phase currents. However, it is possible to
use the IED only for earth fault protection and therefore, the phase currents
may be not connected to the IED. In such cases, if the binary setting of EF
Chk I02/I01 is enabled, second harmonic content of zero sequence current is
considered if the zero sequence current is measured from neutral CT. As
mentioned previously, the binary setting of 3I0 Measured is enabled for this
situation. So, the inrush condition is recognized if the ratio of second

36
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

harmonic content of measured zero sequence current to its fundamental


component exceeds corresponding setting value.

Furthermore, if the fundamental component of zero sequence current


exceeds the upper limit value for unblocking, the earth fault protection will not
be blocked any longer.

On the contrary, if binary setting of EF Chk I2/I1 is set, the inrush condition is
recognized if the ratio of second harmonic content in each phase current to
their fundamental component exceeds setting value.

Furthermore, if the fundamental component of each phase current exceeds


the upper limit value for unblocking, the earth fault protection will not be
blocked any longer.

1.2.3 Direction determination feature

1.2.3.1 Zero-sequence directional element

In this method, the direction determination is performed by comparing the


zero sequence system quantities. In current path, the measured IN current is
valid, when the neutral current is connected to the IED and the binary setting
3I0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise, the IED calculates quantity 3I0 from
the summation of the three phase currents when the binary setting 3I0
Calculated is enabled. In the voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is
used as reference voltage, if it is connected, and the binary setting 3U0
Measured is enabled. Otherwise, the IED calculates the zero sequence
voltage 3V0 from the summation of three phase voltages if binary setting 3U0
Calculated is enabled. Direction determination can be performed by the IED
for 3V0 quantity having a magnitude fall to 2V. Contrary to the directional
phase elements, which work based on the un-faulted voltage as reference
voltage, for the earth fault protection direction element, the zero sequence
voltage is used as the reference voltage. Depending on the connection of the
voltage transformer (setting 3U0 Measured/3U0 Calculated), VN or 3V0
(3V0=VA+VB+VC) is applied.

In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the reference


voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle between 0and 90in clockwise
direction (negative sign). It should be noted that the settings are applied for all
the directional stages of earth fault element. In this way, the vector of rotated
reference voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of fault current -3I0
which lags the fault voltage 3V0 by the fault angle 0_Char. This will provide
the best detection result for the direction determination. The rotated reference

37
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is in range of
80around the rotated reference voltage. If the vector of the fault current -3I0
is in this area, the fault condition is detected as forward direction. The
zero-sequence direction detection characteristic is shown in Figure 6.

90
3I 0

0
3U 0_Ref
0_Char

Forward Bisector
-3 I 0

Figure 6 Direction detection characteristic of zero sequence directional element

where:

0_Char: The settable characteristic angle

1.2.3.2 Negative-sequence directional element

In this method, direction determination is performed by comparing the


negative sequence system quantities. To do so, the calculated negative
sequence current 3I2 is compared with the calculated negative sequence
voltage 3V2. This method is particularly suitable for the condition that the zero
sequence voltage is too low, for example, when a considerable zero
sequence mutual coupling exists between parallel lines or when there is an
unfavorable zero sequence impedance. In such cases it may be desirable to
determine direction of fault current by using negative sequence components.

If the binary setting for negative-sequence direction detection is enabled, the


default direction determination is performed by using the zero sequence
components, however, when the magnitude of zero sequence voltage falls
below permissible threshold of 2V, the negative-sequence directional element
is used to detect direction. On the contrary, if the negative-sequence direction
detection is disabled, the direction of earth fault current is only determined by
the zero sequence components. In this regard, if the magnitude of zero
sequence voltage magnitude is larger than 2V, proper direction determination
38
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

can be detected. However, for the condition that the zero sequence voltages
below 2V, no direction determination would be applied, thus, the fault is
considered as reverse direction.

The fault current -3I2 is in phase opposition to the fault current 3I2 and lags
from the voltage 3V2 by the fault angle 2_Char. To satisfy different
applications, the reference voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle
between 0and 90in clockwise direction (negative sign) to be closely
adjusted to the vector of fault current -3I2. This would provide the best
detection result for direction determination. The rotated reference voltage
defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is in range of 80
around the rotated reference voltage. If the vector of fault current -3I2 is in this
area, the fault condition is detected as forward direction. The negative
sequence direction detection characteristic is shown in Figure 7.

3I2 90

0
3 U 2_ Ref
2_Char

Forward
-3 I 2 Bisector

Figure 7 Direction detection characteristic of negative sequence directional element

where:

2_Char: The settable characteristic angle

1.2.4 Logic diagram

I01 > 3I0_2H_UnBlk

1 AND Ir BLK EF
EF Chk I02/I01

I02/I01 >

39
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Figure 8 Logic diagram for inrush restraint based on measured zero sequence current

Max(Ia1,Ib1,Ic1) >I_2H_UnBlk

1 AND Ir BLK EF
EF Chk I2/I1

Ia2/Ia1 >

Ib2/Ib1 > OR

Ic2/Ic1 >

Figure 9 Logic diagram for inrush restraint based on based on phase currents

UnBlk Fun_VTFail
OR
VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail
AND
U0/I0-

3U0>2V OR Forward
3U0 Calculated

VT Fail AND
Blk Fun_VTFail

U2/I2-
EF U2/I2 Dir
OR
AND

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

UnBlk Fun_VTFail
OR
V1p VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail
AND
U0/I0-

3U0>2V OR Forward
3U0 Meaured

VT Fail AND
Blk Fun_VTFail

U2/I2-
EF U2/I2 Dir
OR
AND

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

40
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Figure 10 Logic diagram for direction determination

I0 >
0
EF1 2H_Blk Off

Ir BLK EF
EF1 2H_Blk On

Func_EF1
1 AND T Trip/Alarm
EF1 Dir Off

Forward
EF1 Dir On

Figure 11 Logic diagram for first definite stage of earth fault protection

I0 Inverse
0
EFInv 2H_Blk Off

Ir BLK EF
EFInv 2H_Blk On

Func_EF Inv
1 AND T Trip/Alarm
EF Inv Dir Off

Forward
EF Inv Dir On

Figure 12 Logic diagram for inverse time stage of earth fault protection

1.3 Input and output signals

IP1 EF1 Trip


IP2 EF2 Trip
IP3 EF Inv Trip
IP0
UP1
UP2
UP3

Table 11 Analog input list

41
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1
IP2 Signal for current input 2
IP3 Signal for current input 3
IP0 Signal for current input 0
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3

Table 12 Binary output list

Signal Description
EF1 Trip Earth fault protection stage 1 trip
EF2 Trip Earth fault protection stage 2 trip
EF Inv Trip Earth fault protection inverse time stage trip

1.4 Setting parameters

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 13 Function setting list for earth fault protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Zero-sequence current
1. In 3I0_EF1 A 0.05In 20.00In
setting for stage 1
2. 0.4 T_EF1 Time delay for stage 1 S 0.00 60.00
Zero-sequence current
3. 1.5In 3I0_EF2 A 0.05In 20.00In
setting for stage 2
4. 0.1 T_EF2 Delay time for stage 2 S 0.00 60.00
5. 1 Curve_EF Inv Inverse time curve 1 12
Zero-sequence current
6. 0.5In 3I0_EF Inv setting for inverse time A 0.05In 20.00In
stage
7. 1 K_EF Inv Time multiplier 0.05 999.0
Time factor for inverse
8. 12 A_EF Inv S 0.001 1000
time stage
Index for inverse time
9. 1 P_EF Inv 0.01 10.00
stage
Delay time for inverse
10. 0 B_EF Inv S 0.000 60.00
time stage
11. 30 Angle_EF Characteristic angle for degree 0.00 90.00

42
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


zero-sequence direction
Characteristic angle for
12. 30 Angle_Neg negative-sequence degree 0.00 90.00
direction
Maximum inrush phase
13. In I_2H_UnBlk A 0.25In 20.00In
current setting
Maximum inrush zero
14. In 3I0_2H_UnBlk sequence current A 0.25In 20.00In
setting
Ratio for second
15. 0.15 Ratio I2/I1 harmonic current to 0.07 0.50
fundamental component
Ratio for zero sequence
second harmonic
16. 0.15 Ratio I02/I01 current to zero 0.07 0.50
sequence fundamental
component

Table 14 Logical linker list for earth fault protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_EF1 Enable or disable the stage 1 of earth fault protection
2. Func_EF2 Enable or disable the stage 2 of earth fault protection
3. Func_EF Inv Enable or disable the inverse time stage of earth fault protection

Table 15 Binary setting list for earth fault protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Enable or disable the
1.8 1 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
direction for stage 1
Enable or disable the inrush
1.9 1 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
restraint for stage 1
Enable or disable the
1.10 1 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
direction for stage 2
Enable or disable the inrush
1.11 1 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
restraint for stage 2
Enable or disable the
1.12 1 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On
direction for inverse stage
Enable or disable the inrush
1.13 1 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
restraint for inverse stage
Enable or disable inrush
1.14 1 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
restraint by I2/I1 or I02/I01
43
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Enable or disable the
1.15 0 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On
negative sequence direction
2.7 0 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated 3I0 measured or calculated
2.8 1 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated 3U0 measured or calculated
Enable or disable the function
2.11 0 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
of CT fail blocking
Enable or disable the function
2.14 1 UnBlk Fun_VT Fail Blk Fun_VT Fail
of VT fail blocking
Stage 1 of overcurrent
4.2 1 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of overcurrent
4.3 1 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
protection alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 16 Event information list

Information Description
EF1 Trip Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
EF2 Trip Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
EF Inv Trip Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command
Inrush Blk Inrush is detected to block function.

Table 17 Alarm information list

Information Description
EF1 Alarm Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
EF Inv Alarm Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 18 Technical data for earth fault protection

Item Rang or value Tolerance


Definite time characteristic
Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
1% setting or +40ms, at 200%
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
operating setting
Reset time approx. 40ms
Reset ratio Approx. 0.95 at I/Ir 0.5

44
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

Inverse time characteristics


Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
IEC standard Normal inverse; IEC60255-151

Very inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Extremely inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20

Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; ANSI/IEEE C37.112,

Short inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Long inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20

Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic IEC60255-151
T=
5% setting + 40ms, at 2
<I/ISETTING < 20
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step
0.001s
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005
set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01

Minimum operating time 20ms


Maximum operating time 100s

Reset mode instantaneous


Reset time approx. 40ms
Directional element
Operating area range of zero 3, at 3U01V
160
sequence directional element
Characteristic angle 0to 90, step 1
Operating area range of negative 3, at 3U22V
160
sequence directional element
Characteristic angle 50to 90, step 1

45
Chapter 4 Earth fault protection

46
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault


protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for sensitive earth fault protection.

47
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

1 Sensitive overcurrent protection

1.1 Introduction

In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is
significantly smaller than load current and phase to phase short circuit
currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the magnitude of
the phase to earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in
the network.

Sensitive earth fault protection can be used to detect and give selective trip of
phase to earth faults in isolated or compensated networks. The protection
function also can be applied to detect high impedance earth faults in solidly or
low-resistance earthed networks.

Sensitive earth fault protection integrated in the IED provides following


features:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

Sensitive earth fault directional element with U0/I0- principle

Sensitive earth fault directional element with Cos principle

Settable directional element characteristic angle to satisfy the different


network conditions and applications

Each stage can be set to be directional, or non-directional independently

Each stage can be set individually to alarm or trip

Displacement voltage can be checked to increase function reliability

Dedicated sensitive CT

VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection function

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Time characteristic

48
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

The time characteristic for each stage can be chosen as definite time stage or
some type of inverse time characteristic. 11 kinds of inverse time
characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user defined time
characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the integrated
directional functions and operate based on measured phase current which is
injected from the dedicated sensitive current transformer.

Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be


combined as desired.

Pickup value for the definite stage can be set in setting value. The measured
current from sensitive CT input is compared with the corresponding setting
value with delay time. If the measured current exceeds the associated pickup
value, after expiry of the time delay, the trip command or alarm signal is
issued. The dropout value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 96%
of the pickup value.

The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_SEF

Equation 5

where:

A_SEF: Time factor for inverse time stage

B_SEF: Delay time for inverse time stage

P_SEF: index for inverse time stage

K_SEF: Time multiplier

By applying proper setting of the aforementioned parameters, the IED


calculates the tripping or alarming time from the measured current in each
phase separately. Once the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal
or alarm signal is issued.

1.2.2 Direction determination feature

49
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

The integrated directional function can be applied to each stage of sensitive


earth fault element via specified binary setting. In order to discriminate
forward or reverse short circuits, the IED provides two methods for sensitive
earth fault direction detection which should be utilized to cover all network
configurations according to the type of grounding. Based on U0/I0-
measurement and based on Cos measurement respectively.

When the U0/I0- or Cos elements used for directional sensitive earth fault
protection, the VT failure condition may result in false or undesired tripping or
alarming. In such situation, it is possible to set operation state for each stage
of sensitive earth fault protection which operates in conjunction with direction
feature by binary setting to block the function or operate without direction
detection. When binary setting is set to UnBlk Fun_VTFail, corresponding
sensitive earth fault stages would not consider direction in case of VT failure.
When it is set to Blk Fun_VTFail, the function will be blocked when VT
failure happens. It is noted that the binary setting affects all the stages of
sensitive earth fault element.

Pay attention to that direction determination based on measured


displacement voltage will not be blocked in case of failure detection in the
three-phase connected to voltage transformer. Similarly, if the direction
determination is based on the calculated displacement voltage, the protection
function will not be blocked as a result of failure detection in U4 voltage
transformer. However, in case of a failure in U4 voltage transformer, the
direction determination based on measured value of displacement voltage will
be blocked depend on the binary setting UnBlk Fun_VTFail/Blk Fun_VTFail
enabled or disabled.

1.2.2.1 U0/I0- measurement

In this method, the direction determination is performed by comparing the


displacement angle between zero sequence system quantities. In current
path, the measured current Is from the sensitive input is applied. In the
voltage path, the displacement voltage VN is used as reference voltage, if it is
connected, and the binary setting 3U0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise the
IED calculates the zero sequence voltage 3V0 from the summation of the
three phase voltages if setting 3U0 Calculated is enabled. The condition for
direction determination with 3V0 quantity is that the magnitude of 3V0 is larger
than the setting U_3V0_SEF

Contrary to the directional phase elements, which work with the un-faulted
voltage as reference voltage, for the sensitive earth fault protection, the zero
sequence voltage is used as the reference voltage for direction determination.
Depending on the connection of voltage transformer (setting 3U0

50
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Measured/3U0 Calculated), the corresponding reference voltage is VN or 3V0


(3V0=VA+VB+VC).

90 - I NS
Forward

Bisector

NS_Char 0
3U0_Ref

I NS

Figure 13 Direction detection characteristic of the sensitive earth fault


directional element by U0/I0-

where:
NS_Char: The settable characteristic angle

In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the reference


voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle between 0and 90in
anticlockwise direction (positive sign). It should be noted that the settings
affect all the directional stages of sensitive earth fault element. In this way, the
vector of rotated reference voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of
fault current -Is which leads the fault voltage 3V0 by the fault angle NS_Char.
This would provide the best possible result for the direction determination.
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The
forward area is in range of 80around the rotated reference voltage.

1.2.2.2 Cos measurement

Similar to U0/I0- method, the direction determination is performed in cos


method by using the measured current Is from sensitive current input together
with the measured or calculated displacement voltage. In this context, the
measured displacement voltage is used if it is connected, and the binary
setting 3U0 Measured is enabled. Otherwise the IED calculates the zero
sequence voltage 3V0 from the summation of the three phase voltages if
setting 3U0 Calculated is enabled. The condition for direction determination
with 3V0 quantity is that the magnitude of 3V0 is larger than the setting
U_3V0_SEF.

51
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Unlike to U0/I0- method, direction determination is performed in Cos


method by using those component of the residual current which is
perpendicular to the directional characteristic (axis of symmetry). Figure 14
shows how the IED adopts complex vector diagram for direction
determination. As can be seen, displacement voltage 3V0 is the reference
magnitude quantity. The axis of symmetry is defined as a line perpendicular to
this quantity. The sensitive earth fault protection would issue a trip command
or an alarm signal if the active component of Is is in the opposite direction of
the reference voltage and has a magnitude exceeds setting IsCOS_SEF.

IS 90

Forward 0
3U0_Ref

- IS

Figure 14 Direction detection characteristic of the sensitive earth fault


directional element by Cos

1.2.3 Logic diagram

U0/I0-
SEF Chk U0/I0
AND Forward
3U0>

Figure 15 Logic diagram for direction determination based on U0/I0- measurement

IsCOS
SEF Chk Iscos
AND Forward
3U0>

Figure 16 Logic diagram for direction determination based on Cos measurement

52
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

UnBlk Fun_VTFail
OR
3U0 Calculated

VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail AND

Forward OR Forward Release

AND
V1p VT Fail
Blk Fun_VTFail
3U0 Measured
OR

UnBlk Fun_VTFail

Figure 17 Influence of VT failure on direction determination of sensitive earth fault protection

Is >

Func_SEF1
AND T Trip/Alarm
1
SFF1 Dir Off
Forward Release
SEF1 Dir On

Figure 18 Logic diagram for the first definite stage of sensitive earth fault protection

Is Inverse

Func_SEF Inv
AND T Trip/Alarm
1
SFF Inv Dir Off
Forward Release
SEF Inv Dir On

Figure 19 Logic diagram for the inverse time stage of sensitive earth fault protection

1.3 Input and output signals

53
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

IS SEF1 Trip
UP1 SEF1 Alarm
UP2 SEF2 Trip
UP3 SEF2 Alarm
SEF Inv Trip
SEF Inv Alarm

Table 19 Analog input list

Signal Description
Is Signal for sensitive current input
UP1 Signal for voltage input 2
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3

Table 20 Binary output list

Signal Description
SEF1 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 trip
SEF1 Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 alarm
SEF2 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 trip
SEF2 Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 alarm
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse time
SEF Inv Trip
stage trip
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse time
SEF Inv Alarm
stage alarm

1.4 Setting parameters

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 21 Function setting list for sensitive earth fault protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


0.005 1.00
Sensitive current (SEF) (SEF)
1. In I_SEF1 A
setting for stage 1 0.05In 20.00In
(Normal) (Normal)

54
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


2. 0.4 T_SEF1 Time delay for stage 1 S 0.00 60.00
0.005 1.00
Sensitive current (SEF) (SEF)
3. 1.5In I_SEF2 A
setting for stage 2 0.05In 20.00In
(Normal) (Normal)
4. 0.1 T_SEF2 Time delay for stage 2 S 0.00 60.00
Curve_SEF
5. 1 Inverse time curve 1 12
Inv
0.005 1.00
Sensitive current
(SEF) (SEF)
6. 0.5In I_SEF Inv setting for inverse A
0.05In 20.00In
stage
(Normal) (Normal)
7. 1 K_SEF Inv Time multiplier 0.05 999.0
Time factor for inverse
8. 12 A_SEF Inv S 0.001 1000
time stage
Index for inverse time
9. 1 P_SEF Inv 0.01 10.00
stage
Delay time for inverse
10. 0 B_SEF Inv S 0.000 60.00
time stage
Characteristic angle
11. 30 Angle_SEF for U0/I0- degree 0.00 90.00
measurement
Sensitve current for
direction determination
12. 0.01 IsCOS_SEF A 0.005 1.00
of IsCos
measurement
Voltage threshold for
13. 20 U_3V0_SEF V 2.00 100.0
direction determination

Table 22 Logical linker list for sensitive earth fault protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_SEF1 Enable or disable the stage 1 of sensitive earth fault protection
2. Func_SEF2 Enable or disable the stage 2 of sensitive earth fault protection
Enable or disable the inverse time stage of sensitive earth
3. Func_SEF Inv
fault protection

Table 23 Binary setting list for sensitive earth fault protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
2.1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On Enable or disable the direction for

55
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
stage 1
Enable or disable the direction for
2.2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
stage 2
Enable or disable the direction for
2.3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
inverse stage
Direction determination by U0/I0-
2.4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
measurement or IsCos measurement
2.8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated 3U0 measured or calculated
Enable or disable the function of VT fail
2.14 UnBlk Fun_VT Fail Blk Fun_VT Fail
blocking
Stage 1 of sensitive earth fault
4.4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
protection alarm or trip
Stage 2 of sensitive earth fault
4.5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of sensitive earth fault
4.6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
protection alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 24 Event information list

Information Description
SEF1 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
SEF2 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
SEF Inv Trip Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command

Table 25 Alarm information list

Information Description
SEF1 Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
SEF2 Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm signal
SEF Inv Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 26 Technical data for sensitive earth fault protection

Item Range or value Tolerance


Definite time characteristic
Current from sensitive CT input 0.005 to 1.000 A , step 0.001 A 3 % setting value or 1 mA

56
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Current from neutral CT input 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3 % setting value or 0.02 Ir


Time delay 0.00 to 60.00, step 0.01 s 1.5 % setting value or +40
ms, at 200% operating setting
Reset ratio Approx. 0.95 when I/In 0.5
Reset time Approx. 40 ms
Inverse time characteristics
Current from sensitive input 0.005 to 1.000 A , step 0.001 A 3 % setting value or 1 mA
Current from normal input 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3 % setting value or 0.02 Ir

IEC standard Normal inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse; with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse; accordance with ANSI/IEEE


C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse

user-defined characteristic 5% setting + 40ms, at 2


A
T= i P
B k <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
1
I SET
with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01


Minimum operating time 20ms

Maximum operating time 100s


Reset mode instantaneous

Reset time approx. 40ms


Directional element for sensitive earth-fault protection
principles I cos
(V0 / I0)
Direction measurement IE and VE measured
or 3V0 calculated
3U0 Minimum voltage threshold 2.00 to 100.00 V, step 0.01 V 3 % setting for measured
voltage;
5 % setting for calculated
voltage
Characteristic angle _SEFChar 0.0to 90.0, step 1 3

57
Chapter 5 Sensitive earth fault protection

Operating area range 160 3

58
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for negative-sequence overcurrent protection.

59
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

1 Negative-sequence overcurrent
protection

1.1 Introduction

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection detects unbalanced loads on the


system. It is especially useful to monitor the unbalanced load of motors. This
is due to the fact that unbalanced loads create counter-rotating fields in
three-phase induction motors, which cause overheating in rotor end zones. In
addition, the protection function may be used to detect interruptions, short
circuits and polarity problems with current transformers. Furthermore, it is
suitable for detecting single-phase and two-phase faults with fault currents
lower than load currents.

The protection provide following features:

Two definite time stages

One inverse time stage

11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic curves as well as


optional user defined characteristic

The first definite stage and inverse stage can be set individually as alarm
or trip stage

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Protection function description

The IED provides three negative-sequence overcurrent protection stages


from which two stages operate as definite time stages and the other one
operates with inverse time-current characteristic. The negative-sequence
overcurrent protection operates based on negative sequence current
calculated from three phase currents, as follows:

Equation 6

60
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Furthermore, each stage is independent from each other and can be


combined as desired.

Individual pickup value for each definite stage can be set in setting value. The
calculated negative sequence current from Equation 6 is compared
separately with the corresponding setting value with delay time. If the
calculated negative-sequence current exceeds the associated pickup value,
after expiry of the time delay, the trip command or alarm signal is issued. The
drop out value of the definite stages is approximately equal to 95% of the
pickup value for I/In 0.5.

The time delay of inverse time characteristic is calculated based on the type
of the set characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier.
For the inverse time characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves
are available, and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:

K_NSOC

Equation 7

where:

A_NSOC: Time factor for inverse time stage

B_NSOC: Delay time for inverse time stage

P_NSOC: index for inverse time stage

K_NSOC: Time multiplier

By applying proper setting of the aforementioned parameters, the IED


calculates the tripping or alarming time from the measured current in each
phase separately. Once the calculated time has been elapsed, the trip signal
or alarm signal is issued.

1.2.2 Logic diagram

61
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

CT Fail
AND T1 NS1 Trip/Alarm
3I2 > 3I2_NSOC1 Func_NSOC1 On

AND T2 NS2 Trip/Alarm


3I2 > 3I2_NSOC2 Func_NSOC2 On

AND NS INV Trip/Alarm


3I2 > 3I2_NSOC Inv Func_NSOC Inv

Figure 20 Logic diagram for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

1.3 Input and output signals

1.4 Setting parameters

IP1 NSOC1 Trip


IP2 NSOC1 Alarm
IP3 NSOC2 Trip
NSOC2 Alarm
NSOC Inv Trip
NSOC Inv Alarm

Table 27 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1
IP2 Signal for current input 2
IP3 Signal for current input 3

Table 28 Binary output list

Signal Description
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
NSOC1 Trip
stage 1 trip
62
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Negative sequence overcurrent protection


NSOC1 Alarm
stage 1 alarm
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
NSOC2 Trip
stage 2 trip
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
NSOC2 Alarm
stage 2 alarm
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
NSOC Inv Trip
inverse time stage trip
Negative sequence overcurrent protection
NSOC Inv Alarm
inverse time stage alarm

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 29 Function setting list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Negative sequence
current setting for
1. In 3I2_NSOC1 A 0.05In 20.00In
stage 1 of NSOC
protection
Time setting for stage
2. 0.4 T_NSOC1 S 0.00 60.00
1 of NSOC protection
Negative sequence
current setting for
3. 1.5In 3I2_NSOC2 A 0.05In 20.00In
stage 2 of NSOC
protection
Time setting for stage
4. 0.1 T_NSOC2 S 0.00 60.00
2 of NSOC protection
Curve_NSO
5. 1 Inverse time curve 1 12
C Inv
Negative sequence
3I2_NSOC current setting for
6. 0.5In A 0.05In 20.00In
Inv inverse stage of NSOC
protection
7. 1 K_NSOC Inv Time multiplier 0.05 999.0
Time factor for inverse
8. 0.056 A_NSOC Inv S 0.001 1000
time stage
Index for inverse time
9. 0.02 P_NSOC Inv 0.01 10.00
stage
Delay time for inverse
10. 0 B_NSOC Inv S 0.000 60.00
time stage

63
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Table 30 Logical linker list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_NSOC1 Enable or disable the stage 1 of negative sequence protection
2. Func_NSOC2 Enable or disable the stage 2 of negative sequence protection
Enable or disable the inverse time stage of negative sequence
3. Func_NSOC Inv
protection

Table 31 Binary setting list for negative-sequence overcurrent protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Stage 1 of negative sequence
4.7 NSOC1 Alarm NSOC1 Trip
overcurrent protection alarm or trip
Inverse stage of negative sequence
4.8 NSOC Inv Alarm NSOC Inv Trip
overcurrent protection alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 32 Event information list

Information Description
NSOC1 Trip Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues trip command
NSOC2 Trip Negative sequence current protection stage 2 issues trip command
NSOC Inv Trip Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues trip command

Table 33 Alarm information list

Information Description
NSOC1 Alarm Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
NSOC Inv Alarm Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 34 Technical data for negative sequence overcurrent protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Definite time characteristic
Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting value or 0.02Ir
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00, step 0.01 s 1% setting or +40ms, at
200% operating setting
Reset time 40 ms

64
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

Reset ratio Approx. 0.95 for I2 /Ir > 0.5


Inverse time characteristics
Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
IEC standard Normal inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Very inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance

Extremely inverse; with IEC60255-151

Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; 5% setting + 40ms, at 2

Short inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in

Long inverse; accordance with ANSI/IEEE


C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic A 5% setting + 40ms, at 2
T= i P
B k
1 <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
I SET

with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005

set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01


Minimum operating time 20ms
Maximum operating time 100s
Reset time approx. 40ms

65
Chapter 6 Negative-sequence
overcurrent protection

66
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Chapter 7 Thermal overload


protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and


output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for thermal overload protection.

67
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

1 Thermal overload protection

1.1 Introduction

The thermal overload protection represents an essential requirement to


prevent protected equipment from thermal damaging due to overloads.
Thermal damage mostly affects the insulating material surrounding the phase
current conductors in transformers, cables or any other power equipment. As
a matter of fact, the insulation material ages too rapidly if the equipment
temperature exceeds the design limit value. Thus, a special protection is
needed to prevent over-temperature condition for the protected object. Since
severity of over-temperature condition is directly proportional to current
squared, the thermal protection operates based on the square of measured
current flowing through the protected object. Furthermore, because the
cumulative nature of over-temperature condition, it is necessary to integrate
previous thermal history of equipment in the protection. This is achieved in
the IED by providing a comprehensive thermal replica of the protected object.
In this regard, the IED provides an overload protection with memory capability
by taking into account both the previous history of an overload and the heat
loss to the environment.

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Function description

The thermal overload protection in the IED is provided with one trip stage as
well as one alarm stage. It is possible to set the alarm stage at a certain
percentage of the setting value applied at the trip stage. They protection
function operates based on an approximate replica of the protected object in
the event of temperature rise caused by overload. The thermal replica is
implemented based on thermal models (Cold or Hot Curve) of IEC60255-8
standard. The temperature rise is calculated separately for each phase in a
thermal replica from the square of the respective phase current. The
maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases is decisive for
evaluation of the thresholds.

The IED calculates the temperature rise of the protected equipment in each
phase, based on following differential equation:

68
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Equation 8

where:

: is thermal time constant of heating for the protected object, in seconds. It is usually
determined by manufacturer of the protected object. This parameter can be set in
setting value.

I: is the measured fundamental current flowing through each phase of the protected
object.

: is the maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current. It is usually


specified by manufacturer of the protected object. This parameter can be set in
setting value.

: is temperature rise of the protected object in per unit of the final temperature rise
at maximum allowed phase current .

According to Equation 8, the tripping time for thermal overload protection is


calculated by the following equation based on Hot Curve in IEC60255-8
standard:

Equation 9

where:

IP: is steady state current previous to the overload.

The IED is capable to calculate tripping time of thermal overload protection


not only based on the Hot Curve, but also based on Cold Curve as defined in
IEC60255-8 standard and equation as following:

Equation 10

From the Equation 9 and Equation 10 can be seen, the cold curve provides
no memory regarding to previous thermal condition of the protected object,
69
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

whereas, by using the hot curve, the protection function is able to represent a
memorized thermal profile of the protected object. It is possible to set which
curve should be considered for thermal overload protection by binary setting
Hot Curve/Cold Curve. If Hot Curve is enabled, tripping time of thermal
overload protection would be calculated based on Equation 9. In contrast, if
applying Cold Curve, Equation 10 would be used for calculation process. It
is noted that binary setting Hot Curve/Cold Curve affects both the alarm and
trip stages.

1.3 Input and output signals

1.4 Setting parameters

IP1 Thermal OL Trip


IP2 Thermal OL Alarm
IP3

Table 35 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1
IP2 Signal for current input 2
IP3 Signal for current input 3

Table 36 Binary output list

Signal Description
Thermal OL Trip Thermal overload protection trip
Thermal OL Alarm Thermal overload protection alarm

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 37 Function setting list for thermal overload protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Current setting for thermal
1. In I_Therm OL A 0.10In 10.00In
overload protection

70
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Time constant for thermal
2. 60 T_Const Therm S 6.0 9999
overload protection
Cool ratio for Hot Curve of
3. 1 Ratio_Cool 0.100 10.00
thermal overload protection
Alarm ratio for thermal
4. 0.9 Ratio_Alarm 0.500 1.000
overload protection

Table 38 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_ThermOL Enable or disable the thermal overload protection

Table 39 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection

Bit 0 1 Description
Enable or disable the alarm function of
2.5 Therm Alarm Off Therm Alarm On
thermal overload protection
Enable or disable the Hot Curve or Cold
2.6 Hot Curve Cold Curve
Curve

1.5 IED reports

Table 40 Event information list

Information Description
Therm OL Trip Thermal overload protection issues trip command

Table 41 Alarm information list

Information Description
Therm OL Alarm Thermal overload protection issues an alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 42 Technical data for thermal overload protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Current 0.1 Ir to 5.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
Thermal heating time constant 1 to 9999 s

71
Chapter 7 Thermal overload protection

Thermal cooling time constant 1 to 9999 s

I eq2
IEC cold curve t ln 2 2
IEC 602558,
I eq I 5% setting or +40ms

I eq2 I P2
IEC hot curve t ln 2 2
IEC 602558,
I eq I 5% setting or +40ms

72
Chapter 8 Current overload protection

Chapter 8 Current overload


protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for current overload protection.

73
Chapter 8 Current overload protection

1 Current overload protection

1.1 Function description

The purpose of the overload protection is used to protect the capacitor bank
against the faults that occur normally by over-voltage which results in
dielectric breakdown. Alarm function and trip function are provided, which can
be enabled or disabled separately.

1.1.1 Logic diagram

Ia>
Func_OL
Ib> OR Talarm Alarm
OL Alarm On
Ic>

Ia>>
Func_OL
Ib>> OR Ttrip Trip

Ic>>

Figure 21 Logic diagram for current overload protection

1.2 Input and output signals

IP1 Overload Alarm


IP2 Overload Trip
IP3

Table 43 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1
IP2 Signal for current input 2

74
Chapter 8 Current overload protection

IP3 Signal for current input 3

Table 44 Binary output list

Signal Description
Thermal OL Trip Thermal overload protection trip
Thermal OL Alarm Thermal overload protection alarm

1.3 Setting parameter

1.3.1 Setting list

Table 45 Function setting list for current overload protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Current setting for alarm of
1. 1.5In I_OL Alarm A 0.05In 20.00In
overload protection
Time setting for alarm of
2. 5 T_OL Alarm s 0.10 6000.0
overload protection
Current setting for trip of
3. 1.2In I_OL Trip A 0.05In 20.00In
overload protection
Time setting for trip of overload
4. 10 T_OL Trip s 0.10 6000.0
protection

Table 46 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_OL Enable or disable the overload protection

Table 47 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Enable or disable the alarm
4.7 OL Alarm Off OL Alarm On
function of overload protection

1.4 IED reports

Table 48 Event information list

Information Description
75
Chapter 8 Current overload protection

Information Description
OL Trip Over load protection issues trip command

Table 49 Alarm information list

Information Description
OL Alarm Over load protection issues an alarm signal

76
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for overvoltage protection.

77
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

1 Overvoltage protection

1.1 Introduction

The overvoltage protection detects abnormal network and machine high


voltage conditions. Overvoltage conditions may occur possibly in the power
system during abnormal conditions such as no-load, light load, or open line
end on long line. The protection can be used as open line end detector or as
system voltage supervision normally.
The protection provides following features:

Two definite time stages

First stage can be set to alarm or trip

Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase


(selectable)

Three phase or single phase voltage connection

Settable dropout ratio

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Overvoltage protection principle

Overvoltage protection element provides two definite time stages which can
be enabled or disabled separately according to the users requirement using
dedicated binary setting Func_OV1 and Func_OV2. The first stage can be
used for tripping or alarming, whereas the second stage is dedicated for
tripping purposes. It is possible to select the operation mode of the first stage
of overvoltage protection using binary setting OV1 Alarm/OV1 Trip. As
expected, setting OV1 Alarm makes it work as an alarming stage, while by
applying OV1 Trip, it is possible to use the first stage as a tripping stage.
Voltage thresholds and time delays can be set individually for each element.
Thus, alarming or tripping can be time-coordinated depending on how severe
the voltage increases are, i.e. in case of a high overvoltage, trip command
can be issued with a short time delay, whereas in case of less severe
overvoltage, trip or alarm command can be issued with a longer time delay. In
this context, settings U_OV1 and T_OV1 correspond to the voltage
threshold and time delay of the first stage. Similarly, settings U_OV2 and
T_OV2 are related to the second stage. The dropout ratio for both the
overvoltage stages can be set through setting Dropout_OV.

78
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Overvoltage protection can operate based on phase to earth voltages VA-N,


VB-N, VC-N or phase to phase voltage VA-B, VB-C, VC-A. The IED is
informed about users preference by binary setting OV PP/OV PE. By
setting OV PP, calculation would be based on phase to phase voltages.
However, by setting OV PE, phase to ground voltages would be employed
in calculation.

1.2.2 Voltage connection

A A
B B
C C

VA VA
VB VB
VC VC
VN VN
CSC-211 CSC-211

Case A Case B

A A
B B
C C

VA VA
VB VB
VC VC
VN VN
CSC-211 CSC-211

Case C Case D

Figure 22 Connection example for overvoltage protection

As can be seen from Figure 22, overvoltage protection is suitable for different
connections of voltage transformer. Overvoltage protection is capable to
operate not only with three phase to earth voltages connection (Case A and
Case B) but also with only one phase to phase voltage (Case C) or phase to
earth voltage (Case D). If only one phase to phase voltage is connected to the
IED, it can be connected to the VA-VB, VB-VC or VC-VA input of the relay. In
this case, overvoltage protection should be set to operate based on OV PP.
Similarly, by connection of one phase to earth voltage to the device, it can be
connected to the VA-VN, VB-VN or VC-VN input of the relay. Furthermore,
overvoltage protection should be set to operate based on OV PE. It should
be noted that if the IED is only provided with one phase to phase voltage, it is

79
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

impossible to calculate phase to earth voltage accurately. This is because the


fact that there is no earth voltage connected to the IED.

It is noted that despite the capability of overvoltage protection to operate


properly with one phase to phase or one phase to earth voltage, maybe there
are some limitation may exist in operation of other protection functions, in
these conditions. For example, direction determination based on three phase
voltages would not operate with one voltage transformer connected.

Furthermore, depending on the application, voltage transformers may be


installed either on the source side or the load side of the associated circuit
breaker. However, these different arrangements have no influence in
behavior of the overvoltage protection.

As mentioned previously, according to different requirements, stage 1 of the


overvoltage protection can be set to trip or alarm, whereas stage 2 is
dedicated for trip. If the setting OV1 Alarm is applied, the alarm output of
respective stage would be marshaled to ALARM contact. On the contrary, if
setting OV1 Trip is applied, the trip command of respective stage can be
configured at different output modules by using the trip binary setting. It
should be noted that the protection functions which are marshaled.

1.2.3 Logic diagram

Ua>

Ub> OR
OV PE
Func_OV1
Uc>
OR T1 Trip/Alarm

Uab>

Ubc> OR
OV PP

Uca>

Figure 23 Overvoltage stage 1 operation logic

80
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Ua>>

Ub>> OR
OV PE

Uc>> Func_OV2
OR T2 Trip

Uab>>

Ubc>> OR
OV PP

Uca>>

Figure 24 Overvoltage stage 2 operation logic

1.3 Input and output signals

UP1 OV1_Trip
UP2 OV2_Trip
UP3 OV1 Alarm
OV2 Alarm

Table 50 Analog input list

Signal Description
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3

Table 51 Binary output list

Signal Description
OV1 Alarm Overvoltage protection stage 1 alarm
OV2 Alarm Overvoltage protection stage 2 alarm
OV1_Trip Overvoltage protection stage 1 trip
OV2_Trip Overvoltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4 Setting parameters

1.4.1 Setting list

81
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

Table 52 Function setting list for overvoltage protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


The voltage setting 40.00 (PE) 100.0(PE)
1. 70 U_OV1 V
for OV stage 1 80.00(PP) 200.0(PP)
The time setting for
2. 0.1 T_OV1 S 0.00 60.00
OV stage 1
The voltage setting 40.00 (PE) 100.0(PE)
3. 70 U_OV2 V
for OV stage 2 80.00(PP) 200.0(PP)
The time setting for
4. 0.1 T_OV2 S 0.00 60.00
OV stage 2
The dropout ratio for
5. 0.95 Dropout_OV 0.90 0.99
OV protection

Table 53 Logical linker list for overvoltage protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_OV1 Enable or disable the overvoltage stage 1
2. Func_OV2 Enable or disable the overvoltage stage 2

Table 54 Binary setting list for overvoltage protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Selection overvoltage connection
KG3.3 OV PP OV PE
as PP or PE
Selection overvoltage protection
KG4.12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
as alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 55 Event information list

Information Description
OV1 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
OV2 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

Table 56 Alarm information list

Information Description
OV1 Alarm Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

82
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

1.6 Technical data

Table 57 Technical data for overvoltage protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance

Voltage connection Phase-to-phase voltages or 3 % setting or 1 V


phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage 40 to 100 V, step 1 V 3 % setting or 1 V
Phase to phase voltage 80 to 200 V, step 1 V 3 % setting or 1 V
Reset ratio 0.90 to 0.99, step 0.01 3 % setting

Time delay 0.00 to 60.00 s, step 0.01s 1 % setting or +50 ms, at


120% operating setting
Reset time <40ms

83
Chapter 9 Overvoltage protection

84
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and


output signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and
technical data used for undervoltage protection.

85
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

1 Undervoltage protection

1.1 Introduction

The undervoltage protection provides protection against dangerous voltage


drops, especially for electric machines.

The protection function provides following features:

Two definite time stages

First stage can be set to alarm or trip

Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase


selectable

Current criteria supervision

Circuit breaker aux. contact supervision

VT secondary circuit supervision, the undervoltage function will be


blocked when VT failure happens

Settable dropout ratio

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Protection function description

Undervoltage protection element provides two definite time stages which can
be enabled or disabled separately according to the users requirement using
dedicated binary settings Fun_UV1 and Fun_UV2. The first stage can be
used for tripping or alarming, whereas the second stage is dedicated for
tripping purposes. It is possible to select the operation mode of the first stage
of undervoltage protection using binary setting UV1 Alarm/ UV1 Trip. As
expected, setting UV1 Alarm makes it work as an alarming stage, while by
applying UV1 Trip it is possible to set the first stage as a tripping
undervoltage stage. Voltage thresholds and time delays can be set
individually for each element. Thus, alarming or tripping can be
time-coordinated depending on how severe the voltage collapses are. In this
context, settings U_UV1 and T_UV1 correspond to the voltage threshold
and time delay of the first stage. Similarly, settings U_UV2 and T_UV2 are
related to the second stage. The dropout ratio for both the undervoltage
stages can be set through setting Dropout_UV.

86
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Undervoltage protection can operate based on phase to earth voltages VA-N,


VB-N, VC-N or phase to phase voltage VA-B, VB-C, VC-A . The IED is
informed about users preference by binary setting UV PP/ UV PE. By
setting UV PP, calculation would be based on phase to phase voltages.
However, by setting UV PE, phase to ground voltages would be employed in
calculation. Furthermore, it is possible to set the IED to operate either when
all the measured phase to earth voltages (or phase to phase voltages
according to the setting of UV PP/ UV PE) falls below the setting values
U_UV1 and U_UV2 or when at least one of the phase to earth voltages (or
at least one of the phase to phase voltages according to the setting of UV
PP/ UV PE) falls below the respective setting values U_UV1 and U_UV2.
This can be achieved by setting of binary setting UV Chk All Phase/UV Chk
One Phase. If setting UV Chk All Phase is applied, the undervoltage
protection would operate only if all of the phase to ground or phase to phase
voltages falls below the setting of U_UV1 and U_UV2. In contrast, if setting
UV Chk One Phase is applied, the protection would operate when at least
one of the phase to earth or phase to phase voltages drops below the
respective thresholds.

1.2.2 Voltage connection

A A
B B
C C

VA VA
VB VB
VC VC
VN VN
CSC-211 CSC-211

Case A Case B

A A
B B
C C

VA VA
VB VB
VC VC
VN VN
CSC-211 CSC-211

Case C Case D

Figure 25 Connection example for undervoltage protection

87
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

As can be seen from Figure 25, undervoltage protection is suitable for


different connections of voltage transformer. Undervoltage protection is
capable to operate not only with three phase to earth voltages connection
(Case A and Case B) but also with only one phase to phase voltage (Case C)
or phase to earth voltage (Case D). If only one phase to phase voltage is
connected to the IED, it can be connected to VA-VB, VB-VC or VC-VA input of
the IED and the IED should be informed by binary setting 1Ph V Connect. In
this case, undervoltage protection should be set to operate based on UV PP
and UV Chk All Phase. Similarly, by connection of one phase to earth
voltage to the device, it can be connected to VA-VN, VB-VN or VC-VN input of
the relay and the relay should be informed by control word 1Ph V Connect.
Furthermore, undervoltage protection should be set to operate based on UV
PE and UV Chk All Phase. It should be noted that if the IED is only provided
with one phase to phase voltage, it is impossible to calculate phase to earth
voltage accurately. This is because the fact that there is no earth voltage
connected to the IED.

It is noted that despite the capability of undervoltage protection to operate


properly by using only one phase to phase or one phase to earth voltage,
maybe there are some limitation in operation of other protection functions, in
these conditions. For example, direction determination based on three phase
voltages would not operate with one voltage transformer connected.

1.2.3 Depending on the VT location

Depending on the application, voltage transformers may be installed either on


the source side or the load side of the associated circuit breaker. These
different arrangements may lead to different behavior of the undervoltage
protection. When a tripping command is issued and the circuit breaker is
opened, full voltage remains on the source side while the load side voltage
becomes zero. In this case, undervoltage protection may remain picked up.
This problem is removed in the IED by integrating additional current criterion.
In this context, undervoltage pickup can be maintained only when the
undervoltage criterion satisfied and a minimum current (setting I_Chk) are
exceeded. The largest of the three phase currents is decisive. In other words,
subsequent to each pickup, the undervoltage protection would drop out as
soon as the current decreases below the setting of I_Chk. If the voltage
transformer is installed on the source side and it is not desired to check
current flow, this feature can be disabled by setting the minimum threshold of
I_Chk to 0. Furthermore, it is possible for the IED to integrate circuit breaker
position in operation logic of undervoltage protection. By employing this
feature, the IED would issue a trip command when the circuit breaker is
closed. In this regard, undervoltage protection would drop out when circuit

88
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

breaker is opened. This feature can be enabled by applying setting UV Chk


CB On in binary setting. This is mainly useful when voltage transformer is
installed on load side. However, if the voltage transformer is installed on the
source side and it is not desired to check circuit breaker position in
undervoltage protection, setting UV Chk CB Off should be applied in binary
setting.

1.2.4 Logic diagram

Ua<

Ub< OR
UV Chk One Phase

Uc<
OR
UV PE
Ua<

Ub< AND
UV Chk All Phase

Uc<
OR UV stg1
Uab<

Ubc< OR
UV Chk One Phase
Uca<
OR
UV PP
Uab<

Ubc< AND
UV Chk All Phase
Uca<

Figure 26 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 1

89
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Ua<<

Ub<< OR
UV Chk One Phase

Uc<<
OR
UV PE
Ua<<

Ub<< AND
UV Chk All Phase

Uc<<
OR UV stg2
Uab<<

Ubc<< OR
UV Chk One Phase
Uca<<
OR
UV PP
Uab<<

Ubc<< AND
UV Chk All Phase
Uca<<

Figure 27 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 2

UV stg1 Fun_UV1
AND T1 Trip/Alarm

1
UV Chk CB Off
3Ph CB Open
UV Chk CB On
Cur.Flow OR

VT fail Note: CSC-211 V01 has no Cur.Flowcriterion

Figure 28 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 1 operation

90
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

UV stg2 Fun_UV2
AND T2 Trip

1
UV Chk CB Off
CB Open
UV Chk CB On
Cur.Flow OR

VT fail Note: CSC-211 V01 has no Cur.Flowcriterion

Figure 29 Logic diagram for undervoltage stage 2 operation

1.3 Input and output signals

UP1 UV1 Trip


UP2 UV2 Trip
UP3 UV1 Alarm
IP1
IP2
IP3
Ph A CB Open
Ph B CB Open
Ph C CB Open

Table 58 Analog input list

Signal Description
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3

Table 59 Binary input list

Signal Description
Ph A CB Open Phase A open status of CB
Ph B CB Open Phase B open status of CB
Ph C CB Open Phase C open status of CB

91
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Table 60 Binary output list

Signal Description
UV1 Alarm Undervoltage protection stage 1 alarm
UV1_Trip Undervoltage protection stage 1 trip
UV2_Trip Undervoltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 61 Function setting list for undervoltage protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


5.00 75.0
Voltage setting for stage 1 of (PE) (PE)
1. 40 U_UV1 V
undervoltage protection 10.00 150.0
(PP) (PP)
Time setting for stage 1 of
2. 0.1 T_UV1 s 0.00 120.0
undervoltage protection
5.00 75.0
Voltage setting for stage 2 of (PE) (PE)
3. 40 U_UV2 V
undervoltage protection 10.00 150.0
(PP) (PP)
Time setting for stage 2 of
4. 0.1 T_UV2 s 0.00 120.0
undervoltage protection
Dropout ratio for undervoltage
5. 1.05 Dropout_UV 1.01 2.00
protection
Current setting for
6. 0.2In I_Chk A 0.00In 2.00In
undervoltage protection

Table 62 Logical linker list for undervoltage protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_UV1 Enable or disable the stage 1 of undervoltage protection
2. Func_UV2 Enable or disable the stage 2 of undervoltage protection

Table 63 Binary setting list for undervoltage protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
2.9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect Single phase or three phase

92
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
voltage connection
Enable or disable the function of
3.0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
checking CB status
Enable or disable the function of
3.1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase checking single phase or three
phase voltage
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth
3.2 UV PP UV PE
discrimination
Stage 1 of undervoltage
4.11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
protection alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 64 Event information list

Information Description
UV1 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
UV2 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command

Table 65 Alarm information list

Information Description
UV1 Alarm Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal

1.6 Technical data

Table 66 Technical data for undervoltage protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Voltage connection Phase-to-phase voltages or 3 % setting or 1 V
phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage 5 to 75 V , step 1 V 3 % setting or 1 V

Phase to phase voltage 10 to 150 V, step 1 V 3 % setting or 1 V


Reset ratio 1.01 to 2.00, step 0.01 3 % setting
Time delay 0.00 to 120.00 s, step 0.01 s 1 % setting or +50 ms, at 80%
operating setting
Current criteria 0.08 to 2.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
Reset time 50 ms

93
Chapter 10 Undervoltage protection

94
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Chapter 11 Displacement voltage


protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for displacement voltage protection.

95
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

1 Displacement voltage protection

1.1 Introduction

In some applications, it is necessary to monitor the displacement voltage to


detect an earth fault in power system. This protection is usually applied in
networks where the earth fault current is limited.

The protection provide following features:

Two definite time stages

Each stage can be set to alarm or trip

Faulty phase discrimination

3U0 based on calculated summation of 3 phase voltage or measured


injected residual voltage

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Displacement voltage input

The displacement voltage 3V0 can be directly applied to the IED or can be
calculated based on the connected three phase to ground voltages
(3V0=VA+VB+VC). In the latter case, the three voltage inputs must be
connected to voltage transformers in a ground-wye configuration. If the IED is
only provided with phase to phase voltages or provided only one phase to
earth or phase to phase voltage, it is not possible to calculate a displacement
voltage. In this case, the direction cannot be determined for earth fault or
sensitive earth fault protection.

If the displacement voltage is directly applied to the IED and the binary setting
3U0 Measured is enabled, it is not affected by VT fail detection on
three-phase connected voltage. Similarly, if the displacement voltage is
calculated based on the three-phase voltages and the binary setting 3U0
Calculated is enabled, it would not be blocked as a result of failure detection
in U4 voltage transformer. However, in case of a failure in U4 voltage
transformer, the displacement voltage protection based on measured value
3V0 would be blocked.

1.2.2 Protection description

96
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

The displacement voltage protection is used to detect ground faults and to


determine direction of earth faults. More information about direction
determination based on displacement voltage is presented in other
subsections. Two definite stages included in this protection for detection of
earth faults. Each stage can be set to issue an alarm signal or a trip command.
This can be achieved by binary settings 3V01 Trip/3V01 Alarm and 3V02
Trip/3V02 Alarm. For example, by applying settings 3V01 Alarm and 3V02
Trip, the first stage would operate as an alarming stage, whereas the second
one would operate as tripping stage. If each stage is set to alarm, respective
output would be marshaled to ALARM contact. In contrast, by applying
setting trip to a stage, the trip output can be configured to various trip outputs
with the trip binary setting. It should be noted that the protection function
which is marshaled to BO1 would initiate CBF function. Generally, stage 1 is
applied to monitor light earth faults and usually used as the alarm stage.
However, stage 2 is applied to detect severe earth fault and therefore is used
as the trip stage.

Individual pickup value for each definite stage can be defined by setting
U_3V01 and U_3V02. With these settings, the measured or calculated
displacement voltage is compared separately with the setting value for each
stage. If the respective value is exceeded, a trip or alarm time delay timer is
started. Each timer is set to count up to a user-defined time delay. The time
delay can be set for each definite stage individually via settings T_3V01 and
T_3V02. After the user-defined time delays elapsed, a trip command or an
alarm signal is issued by respective stage.

Furthermore, it is possible to determine the faulty phase after expiration of


time delay for the first stage. A precondition is that three phase to ground
voltages should be connected to the IED in a grounded wye configuration. By
doing so, the individual phase to ground voltages is measured and is
compared with settings U_Phase low and U_Phase up. In this context, if
the measured phase to ground voltage in a single phase falls below the
threshold U_Phase low and at the same time the magnitude of the phase
voltages in the remained phases are above the setting value U_Phase up,
an earth fault is recognized at the phase having voltage magnitude below
U_Phase low threshold.

1.2.3 Logic diagram

97
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

BLK
3V0 3V0 1
OP
Func_3V01
AND T1 Trip/Alarm
3U0>

Func_3V02
AND T2 Trip/Alarm
3U0>>

Figure 30 Logic diagram for displacement voltage protection

3V0 1 OP
AND Gnd A
VA >

VA <

VB >
AND Gnd B
VB <

VC >

VC < AND Gnd C

Figure 31 Logic diagram for fault phase determination

1.3 Input and output signals

UP1 3V01_Trip
UP2 3V02_Trip
UP3 3V01 Alarm
UP4 3V02 Alarm

Table 67 Analog input list

98
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Signal Description
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3
UP4 Signal for voltage input 4

Table 68 Binary output list

Signal Description
Displacement voltage protection stage 1
3V01 Alarm
alarm
Displacement voltage protection stage 2
3V02 Alarm
alarm
3V01_Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 1 trip
3V02_Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 2 trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 69 Function setting list for displacement voltage protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


The voltage setting for
1. 20 U_3V01 displacement voltage protection V 2.00 100.0
stage 1
The time setting for
2. 1 T_3V01 displacement voltage protection S 0.00 60.00
stage 1
The voltage setting for
3. 30 U_3V02 displacement voltage protection V 2.00 100.0
stage 2
The time setting for
4. 0.5 T_3V02 displacement voltage protection S 0.00 60.00
stage 2
Low voltage setting for fault
5. 20 U_Phase low V 10.00 100.0
phase determination
High voltage setting for
6. 45 U_Phase up remained phase when fault V 10.00 100.0
occurs
99
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Table 70 Logical linker list for displacement voltage protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_3V01 Enable or disable the displacement voltage stage 1
2. Func_3V02 Enable or enable the displacement voltage stage 2

Table 71 Binary setting list for displacement voltage protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Selection the measured voltage
KG2.8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated or calculated voltage for
displacement voltage protection
Selection the stage 1 of
KG4.9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip displacement voltage protection
to alarm or trip
Selection the stage 2 of
KG4.10 3V02 Alarm 3V02 Trip displacement voltage protection
to alarm or trip

1.5 IED reports

Table 72 Event information list

Information Description
3V01 Trip Voltage displacement protection stage 1 issues trip signal
3V02 Trip Voltage displacement protection stage 2 issues trip signal

Table 73 Alarm information list

Information Description
3V01 Alarm Voltage displacement protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
3V02 Alarm Voltage displacement protection stage 2 issues an alarm signal
PhA Grounded Phase A is grounded
PhB Grounded Phase B is grounded
PhC Grounded Phase C is grounded

1.6 Technical data

Table 74 Technical data for displacement voltage protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance

100
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

Pickup threshold 3V0 2 to 100 V, step 1 V 5 % setting value or 1 V


(calculated)
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00 s, step 0.01s 1 % setting or +50 ms, at
120% operating setting
Reset ratio Approx. 0.95

101
Chapter 11 Displacement voltage protection

102
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure


protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in circuit breaker failure protection.

103
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

1 Circuit breaker failure protection

1.1 Introduction

The circuit breaker failure protection is able to detect a failure of the circuit
breaker during a fault clearance. It ensures fast back-up tripping of
surrounding breakers by tripping relevant bus sections.

Once a circuit breaker operating failure occurs on a feeder/transformer, the


bus section which the feeder/transformer is connected with can be selectively
isolated by the protection. In addition a transfer trip signal is issued to trip the
remote end circuit breaker of the feeder.

In the event of a circuit breaker failure with a busbar fault, a transfer trip signal
is issued to trip the remote end circuit breaker of the feeder.

The current criteria are in combination with three phase currents, zero and
negative sequence current to achieve a higher security.

The function can be set to give three phase re-trip of the own breaker to avoid
unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect starting due to
mistakes during testing.

Two trip stages (local CB and surrounding breaker tripping)

Transfer trip command to the remote line end in second stage

Internal/ external initiation

Three phase CBF initiation for sub-transmission system and distribution


system

Settable CB Aux contacts checking

Current criteria checking (including phase current, zero and negative


sequence current)

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Protection description

Circuit breaker failure protection can be enabled or disabled in the IED via
binary setting Func_CBF. If setting ON is applied, CBF protection would
be enabled. In this case, by operation of a protection function, and
subsequent CBF initiation by respective protection function, a programmed
timer runs toward a preset time delay limit. This time delay is set by user
104
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

under the settings T_CBF1. If the circuit breaker has not been opened after
expiration of the preset time limit, the circuit breaker failure protection issues
a command to trip circuit breaker (e.g. via a second trip coil). If the circuit
breaker doesnt respond to the repeated trip command, until another preset
delay time which is set at T_CBF2, the protection issues a trip command to
isolate the fault by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breakers (e.g. the
other CBs connected to the same bus section as the faulty CB).

Initiation of CBF protection can be performed by both the internal and external
protection functions. If it is desired to initiate the CBF protection by means of
external protection functions, specified binary inputs (BI) should be
marshaled. Internal protection functions can initiate the CBF protection
integrated in the IED.

There are two criteria for breaker failure detection: the first one is to check
whether the actual current flow effectively disappeared after a tripping
command had been issued. The second one is to evaluate the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact status.

1.2.2 Current criterion evaluation

Since circuit breaker is supposed to be open when current disappears from


the circuit, the first criterion (current monitoring) is the most reliable way for
IED to be informed about proper operation of circuit breaker. Therefore,
current monitoring is applied to detect circuit breaker failure condition. In this
context, the monitored current of each phase is compared with the
pre-defined setting. Furthermore, it is possible to implement current checking
in case of zero-sequence ( ) and negative-sequence currents
2
(3I2=IA+a IB+aIC) via binary setting. If the zero-sequence and
negative-sequence currents checking are enabled, zero sequence and
negative-sequence current is compared separately with the corresponding
threshold.

1.2.3 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation

For protection functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on


current, current flow is not a suitable criterion for proper operation of the
breaker. In this case, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact
should be used to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. It is
possible to evaluate the circuit breaker operation from its auxiliary contact
status. A precondition for evaluating circuit breaker auxiliary contact is that
open status of CB should be marshaled to binary inputs.

105
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

In addition, it should be noted that evaluation of circuit breaker auxiliary


contacts is performed in CBF function only when the current flow monitoring
has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the
running time of CBF timers, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon
as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contacts dont
indicate that the circuit breaker has opened.

1.2.4 Logic diagram

Ia>

Ib> OR
CBF Chk I0/2 Off
OR Curr. Crit.
Ic>

3I0> AND
OR
3I2>
AND

OR
CBF Chk I0/2 On
AND

AND

Figure 32 Logic diagram for current criterion

3Ph CB Open

3Ph CB Open AND CB is closed

CBF INIT
AND

Curr. crit.
OR

Figure 33 Logic diagram for circuit breaker evaluation criterion

106
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

CB is closed
CBF Chk CB On
OR
Curr. crit. Func_CBF
AND T1 CBF1

CBF INIT
T2 CBF2

Figure 34 Logic diagram for circuit breaker failure protection

1.3 Input and output signals

IP1 CBF1 Trip


IP2 CBF2 Trip
IP3
IN
CBF Init
3Ph CB Open
3Ph CB Close

Table 75 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
IN signal for zero sequence current input

Table 76 Binary input list

Signal Description

CBF Init CBF initiation


3Ph CB Open Three Phase CB open
3Ph CB Close Three phase CB close

Table 77 Binary output list

Signal Description
CBF1 Trip Circuit breaker failure protection stage 1 trip
CBF2 Trip Circuit breaker failure protection stage 2 trip
107
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 78 Function setting list for circuit breaker failure protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Phase current setting for CBF
1. In I_CBF A 0.05In 20.00In
protection
Zero-sequence current setting
2. In 3I0_CBF A 0.05In 20.00In
for CBF protection
Negative-sequence current
3. In 3I2_CBF A 0.05In 20.00In
setting for CBF protection
Delay time for stage 1 of CBF
4. 0 T_CBF1 s 0.00 60.00
protection
Delay time for stage 2 of CBF
5. 0.2 T_CBF2 s 0.10 60.00
protection

Table 79 Logical linker list for circuit breaker failure protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_CBF Enable or disable the circuit breaker failure protection

Table 80 Binary setting list for circuit breaker failure protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
2.7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated 3U0 is measured or calculated
Enable or disable the function for
3.6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On checking zero or negative
sequence current
Enable or disable the function for
3.7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
checking CB status

1.5 IED reports

Table 81 Event information list

Information Description
CBF1 Trip The first stage CBF issues trip command
CBF2 Trip The second stage CBF issues trip command

108
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

Information Description
CBF Initiate CBF function is initiated

1.6 Technical data

Table 82 Technical data for circuit breaker failure protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


phase current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
Negative sequence current
zero sequence current
Time delay of stage 1 0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s 1% setting or +25 ms, at

Time delay of stage 2 0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s 200% operating setting

Reset ratio >0.95


Reset time of stage 1 < 20ms

109
Chapter 12 Circuit breaker failure protection

110
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
included in circuit breaker failure protection.

111
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

1 Dead zone protection

1.1 Introduction

The IED provides this protection function to protect the area between circuit
breaker and CT in the case that CB is open, namely dead zone. Therefore, by
occurrence of a fault in dead zone, the short circuit current is measured by
protection IED while CB auxiliary contacts indicate the CB is open.

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Function description

The protection can be enabled or disabled using dedicated binary setting. If


the protection function is enabled, by operation of a protection function, and
subsequent CBF initiation by respective protection function, a programmed
timer runs toward a preset time delay limit. This time delay is set by user in
the setting T_Dead Zone. If the fault current has not been disappeared after
expiration of the preset time limit even now the circuit breaker has been
opened, the dead zone protection would issue a trip command to isolate the
fault by tripping other surrounding backup circuit breakers (e.g. the other CBs
connected to the same bus section as the faulty CB).

When one bus side CT of feeder is applied, once a fault occurs in the dead
zone, the IED trips the relevant busbar zone. Tripping logic is illustrated in
Figure 35.

112
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

trip
Bus

IFAULT

Line1 Line2 LineN

Legend:

Opened CB
Closed CB

Figure 35 Tripping logic when applying bus side CT

When one line side CT is applied, when a fault occurs in the dead zone,
protection relay sends a transfer trip to remote end relay to isolate the fault.
Tripping logic is illustrated in Figure 36.

113
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

Inter trip
Busbar

IFAULT

Line1 Line2 LineN

Trip
Relay

Legend:

Opened CB
Closed CB

Figure 36 Tripping logic when applying line side CT

1.2.2 Logic diagram

CBF INIT

Curr. Crit. Func_DZ


AND T DZ
3Ph CB Open

3Ph CB Close

Figure 37 Logic diagram for dead zone protection

1.3 Input and output signals

114
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

IP1 Dead Zone Trip


IP2
IP3
CBF Init
3Ph CB Open
3Ph CB Close

Table 83 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3

Table 84 Binary input list

Signal Description
CBF Init CBF initiation
3Ph CB Open Three phase CB open
3Ph CB Close Three phase CB Close

Table 85 Binary output list

Signal Description
DeadZone_Trip Dead Zone protection trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 86 Function setting list for dead zone protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Time delay for dead zone
1. 0.2 T_Dead Zone s 0.00 60
protection
Phase current setting for CBF
2. In I_CBF A 0.05In 20In
protection

Table 87 Logical linker list for dead zone protection

115
Chapter 13 Dead zone protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


1. On Func_DZ Enable or disable the dead zone protection

1.5 IED reports

Table 88 Event information list

Information Description
Dead Zone Trip The dead zone function issues trip command

1.6 Technical data

Table 89 Technical data for dead zone protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance

Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir


Time delay 0.00s to 32.00s, step 0.01s 1% setting or +40 ms, at
200% operating setting
Reset ratio >0.95

116
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

Chapter 14 Synchro-check and


energizing check function

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used synchro-check and energizing check function.

117
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

1 Synchro-check and energizing check


function

1.1 Introduction

The synchronism and voltage check function ensures that the stability of the
network is not endangered when switching a line onto a busbar. The voltage
of the feeder to be energized is compared to that of the busbar to check
conformances in terms of magnitude, phase angle and frequency within
certain tolerances.

The synchro-check function checks whether the voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker are synchronizing, or at least one side is dead to ensure
closing can be done safely.

When comparing the two voltages, the synchro check uses the voltages from
busbar and outgoing feeder. If the voltage transformers for the protective
functions are connected to the outgoing feeder side, the reference voltage
has to be connected to a busbar voltage.

If the voltage transformers for the protective functions are connected to the
busbar side, the reference voltage has to be connected to a feeder voltage.

1.2 Function principle

The synchronization function can either work together with automatic


reclosing function or with manual closure or in both cases. Thus,
synchronization check can be requested in two following ways:

Internal or external automatic reclosing request

Manual closing request

The external automatic reclosing and manual closing are initiated through
corresponding binary input respectively. When a synchronization request is
received to the function, it can work based on different close permission
criteria. The criteria can be selected for auto reclosure or manual closure
separately. The binary settings are AR_Override,AR_Syn
check,AR_EnergChkDLLB,AR_EnergChkLLDB, AR_EnergChkDLDB
for auto reclosure, and MC_Override, MC_Syn check,
MC_EnergChkDLLB, MC_EnergChkLLDB, MC_EnergChkDLDB are

118
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

settable for manual closure. The meaning of each operation mode is as


follows:

Syn check: by applying this setting, with any synchronization request, the
synchronization condition is checked continuously.

Override: by applying this setting, with any synchronization request, the


synchronizing OK condition is released.

EnergChkDLLB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the dead line and live bus conditions are checked.

EnergChkLLDB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the live line and dead bus conditions are checked.

EnergChkDLDB: by applying this setting, with any synchronization


request, the dead line and dead bus conditions are checked.

Synchronization check can operate based on different voltage input


configurations. Reference voltage U4 can be phase to phase or phase to
earth voltage. Accordingly, the setting Phase_UL should be set as phase to
phase or phase to earth voltage, respectively. Both the setting and voltage
connection must be consistent. Pay attention to the single phase voltage
connection of Va, Vb, Vc, phase A or phase B should be connected in order to
get accurate frequency. Table 90 shows the assignment of the settable
values for phase determination.

Table 90 Setting for phase determination

Phase Setting ValuePhase_UL


A 1
B 2
C 3
AB 4
BC 5
CA 6

1.2.1 Synchro-check mode

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference


values are measured in the IED and are available for the synchro-check
function for evaluation.

By any synchronization request, the synchronization conditions will be

119
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

checked continuously. If the line voltages and busbar voltages are larger than
the value of Umin_Syn and meet the synchronization conditions,
synchronized reclosure can be performed.

At the end of the dead time, synchronization request will be initiated and the
synchronization conditions are continuously checked to be met for a certain
time during maximal extended time T_MaxSynExt. By satisfying
synch-check condition in this period, the monitor timer will stop and close
command will be issued for AR.

If the synchronization checking close permission criterion is used for manual


closure, the corresponding binary input should be active. When the binary
input is activated, a monitoring time T_MaxSynReq is started. This time is
considered for synchronizing process. During time period of T_MaxSynReq,
whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for T_Syn Chk, the
monitoring time would be stopped, and the output for manual close Syn OK
is energized. Syn OK output would be held if following conditions are met:

Synchronization conditions are met

Binary input for manual closure is energized

Monitoring time T_MaxSynReq does not elapse

Before releasing a close command at synchronization conditions, all of the


following conditions should be satisfied:

All three phases voltage U(a,b,c) should be above the setting value
Umin_Syn.

The reference voltage U4 should be above the setting value Umin_Syn.

The voltage difference should be within the permissible deviation U_Syn


Diff

The angle difference should be within the permissible deviation


Angle_Syn Diff

The frequency difference should be within the permissible deviation


Freq_Syn Diff

1.2.2 Energizing check mode

120
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

In this mode of operation, the low voltage (dead) condition is checked


continuously whenever synchronization check is requested. If the line
voltages are less than Umax_Energ, reclosure can be performed. If the line
voltages and busbar voltages are all larger than Umin_Syn, the check mode
will automatically turn to full synchronization check mode.

In auto-recloser procedure, synchronization check request is triggered at the


end of the dead time. If the low voltage conditions are continuously met for a
certain numbers and during maximum extended time T_MaxSynExt, the
monitor timer will stop and close command will be issued for AR.

Before releasing a close command in low voltage conditions, one of the


following conditions need to be checked according to requirement:

Energizing check for dead line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkDLLB is on

Energizing check for live line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkLLDB is on

Energizing check for dead line and dead bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word AR_EnergChkDLDB is on

1.2.3 Override mode

In this mode, a synchronizing OK signal would be released whenever a


synchronization check request is received from autoreclosure or a manual
closure.

1.2.4 Logic diagram

121
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn

U4>Umin_Syn

Anglediff<Angle_Syn Diff AND T_Syn Check


Synchr-check
AND meet

Freqdiff<Freq_Syn Diff

Udiff<U_Syn Diff

AR_EnergChkDLLB on T_MaxSynExt Synchr-check fail

U4 <Umax_Energ

Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn AND

VT_Line off

AR_EnergChkLLDB on

U4>Umin_Syn
Energizing check meet
OR
Ua(Ub,Uc) AND
<Umax_Energ

VT_Line off

AR_EnergChkDLDB on

U4<Umax_Energ
AND
Ua(Ub,Uc)
<Umax_Energ

AR_EnergChkDLLB on

U4 >Umin_Syn

Ua(Ub,Uc) AND
<Umax_Energ
VT_Line on

AR_EnergChkLLDB on

U4<Umax_Energ

Ua(Ub,Uc) AND
>Umin_Syn
VT_Line on

Figure 38 Logic diagram for synchro-check function

1.3 Input and output signals

122
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

UP1
UP2
UP3
UP4
BI3/Init AR
BI5/Syn Req

Table 91 Analog input list

Signal Description
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
UP2 Signal for voltage input 2
UP3 Signal for voltage input 3
UP4 Signal for voltage input 4

Table 92 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI3/Init AR Binary input 3/Initiation autoreclosing
BI5/Syn Req Binary input 5/Synchronization request

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 93 Function setting list for synchro-check and energizing check function

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Time for synchro-check
1. 500 T_Syn Chk S 0.05 60.00
function
Maximum time for extending
2. 0.1 T_MaxSynExt S 0.05 60.00
synchronization check
Maximum time for
3. 0.1 T_MaxSynReq S 0.05 60.00
synchronization check
4. 1 Phase_UL Phase determination setting 1.00 6.00
Angle difference for
5. 10 Angle_Syn Diff synchro-check function Degree 1.00 80.00

Voltage difference for


6. 5 U_Syn Diff V 1.00 40.00
synchro-check function

123
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.

Frequency difference for


7. 0.02 Freq_Syn Diff HZ 0.02 2.00
synchro-check function
Minimum voltage for
8. 43 Umin_Syn V 60.00 130.0
synchronization check
Maximum voltage for
9. 17 Umax_Energ V 20.00 100.0
Energizing check

Table 94 Logical linker list for synchro-check and energizing check protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


1. On Func_AR Enable or disable the synchronization check function
2. On Func_MC Enable or disable the synchronization check function

Table 95 Binary setting list for synchro-check and energizing check protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Synchrozination check mode
3.8 1 Energizing for DLLB check
mode
Energizing for LLDB check
3.9 0 Selection of AR check mode
mode
Energizing for DLDB check
mode
3.10 0
Override mode
Synchrozination check mode
3.11 1 Energizing for DLLB check
mode
Energizing for LLDB check
3.12 0 Selection of MC check mode
mode
Energizing for DLDB check
mode
3.13 0
Override mode

1.5 IED reports

Table 96 Event information list

Information Description
Syn Ok Synchronization check OK
Syn Request Check synchronization

124
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

Information Description
Syn Vdiff fail Voltage difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Ang fail Angle difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Fdiff fail Frequency difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Failure Synchronization check timeout

1.6 Technical data

Table 97 Technical data for synchro-check and energizing check function

Item Rang or Value Tolerance

Operating mode Synchronization check:


Synch-check
Energizing check, and
synch-check if energizing
check failure
Override
Energizing check:
Dead V4 and dead V3Ph
Dead V4 and live V3Ph
Live V4 and dead V3Ph

Voltage threshold of dead line or 10 to 50 V (phase to earth), step 3 % setting or 1 V


bus 1V

Voltage threshold of live line or 30 to 65 V (phase to earth), step 3 % setting or 1 V


bus 1V
V-measurement Voltage 1 to 40 V (phase-to-earth), steps 1V
difference 1V
f-measurement (f2>f1; f2<f1) 0.02 to 2.00 Hz, step, 0.01 Hz, 20 mHz
-measurement (2>1; 1 to 80 , step, 1 3
2<1)

Minimum measuring time 0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s, 1.5 % setting value or +60
ms
Maximum synch-check 0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s, 1 % setting value or +50 ms
extension time

125
Chapter 14 Synchro-check and
Energizing check function

126
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Chapter 15 Autoreclosing function

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for automatic reclosure function.

127
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

1 Autoreclosing function

1.1 Introduction

For restoration of the normal service after a transient fault an autoreclosing


attempt is mostly made for overhead lines. Experiences show that about 85%
of faults have transient nature and will disappear after an auto reclosing
attempt is performed. This means that the line can be re-energized in a short
period. The reconnection is accomplished after a dead time via the automatic
reclosing function. If the fault is permanent or short circuit arc has not
disappeared, the protection will re-trip the breaker. Main features of the
autoreclosing are as follows:

4 shots automatic recloser (selectable)

Individually settable dead time for each shot

Internal/external AR initiation

Three phase AR operation

CB ready supervision

CB Aux. contact supervision

Cooperation with internal synch-check function for reclosing command

1.2 Function principle

Three-pole multi-shot auto-recloser (AR) function is provided with selectable


number of shots from 1 to 4. This function can be enabled or disabled by
binary setting. In addition, it is possible to enable or disable AR function by
binary input BI1/AR Off. In this context, if binary input BI1/AR Off is active,
AR function would be disabled, even though the internal setting which is
applied at Func_AR. The priority for enable or disable the function with
binary input BI1/AR Off is higher than binary setting Func_AR. The
integrated AR function can be enabled, only when binary input BI1/AR Off is
inactive and at the same time binary setting Func_AR is set to ON.

1.2.1 Auto-reclosing initiation modules

Initiation of AR function can be performed by internal protection functions or


via external binary input BI3/Init AR. Regarding the internal protection
functions, it is possible to perform reclosing attempt in conjunction with

128
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

protection functions illustrated in Table 98.

Table 98 Protection functions for initiation AR

Protection Function Protection stage Binary setting

Definite time stage 1 OC1 Init AR

Overcurrent protection Definite time stage 2 OC2 Init AR

Inverse time stage OC Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1 EF1 Init AR

Earth fault protection Definite time stage 2 EF2 Init AR

Inverse time stage EF Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1 SEF1 Init AR

Sensitive earth fault protection Definite time stage 2 SEF2 Init AR

Inverse time stage SEF Inv Init AR

Definite time stage 1 NSOC1 Init AR

Negative sequence protection Definite time stage 2 NSOC2 Init AR

Inverse time stage NSOC Inv Init AR

In the table, the first and second columns show the protection functions,
respectively, while the third column introduces the binary setting which is
possible to set protection functions to work in conjunction with AR.

Furthermore, it is possible to program AR to operate for three-phase faults.


This can be achieved by applying setting 3P Fault Init AR/3P Fault Blk AR.
By this setting, autoreclosing would be possible in case of three-phase faults,
in addition to single-phase fault. However, if it is not desired to reclose in case
of three-phase faults, the IED should be set via setting 3P Fault Blk AR.

1.2.2 Autoreclosing logic

To prevent automatic reclosing during feeder dead status (circuit breaker (CB)
open), for example, by relay testing, AR is initiated at first shot only when the
CB has been closed for more than a time period defined by T_AR Reset.
Subsequent to initiation of AR, the dead time do not start until the IED is
informed about open status of CB through binary input. The delay of dead
time can be extended up to time setting T_Max. CB Open. During this time,
whenever CB open status is recognized by the IED, dead time is started. If

129
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

monitoring time T_Max. CB Open elapses and CB open status is not still
detected by the IED, AR function would be blocked for duration of AR reset
time which is defined by T_AR Reset. In this case, reclosing attempt would
be announced as unsuccessful (annunciation AR Failure).

If circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used for the CB,
monitoring time T_Max CB Open should be set shorter than the delay time
for detection of circuit breaker failure. By doing so, make sure that no
reclosing takes place for a faulty circuit breaker. No reclosing would take
place for CBF stage 2 or dead zone function operation.

As mentioned previously, if CB open position is detected by the IED during


monitoring time T_Max. CB Open, dead time is started and would last for
pre-defined time T_3P AR1 in case of the first reclosing shot (respective
dead times for other reclosing shots are set by T_3P AR2, T_3P AR3 and
T_3P AR4, for second, third and forth shots, respectively). After dead time
expiration, a monitoring time T_MaxSynExt is started. In fact, dead time can
be extended by T_MaxSynExt. This time is considered for synchronizing
process. In this context, at the end of dead time, IED starts to check
synchronization condition. During monitoring time period T_MaxSynExt,
whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for T_Syn Chk, the
monitoring time would be stopped, AR close command will be issued to close
circuit breaker. However, at the end of monitoring time T_MaxSynExt, if
synchronization condition is not still met continuously for T_Syn Chk, AR
function would be blocked for a time period defined by T_AR Reset.
Furthermore, reclosing attempt would be announced as unsuccessful
(annunciation AR Failure).

Regarding the close command, it has a pulse nature which lasts for 500ms at
most. As expected, no synchronization check takes place during this pulse
time. If during this pulse time, the auxiliary contact of CB indicates that the CB
has been closed or a current flow is detected by the IED, the close command
pulse will be reset.

Once the close command pulse is issued (rising edge) to close the circuit
breaker, reclaim time T_Reclaim is started, within this time it is checked
whether the reclosing attempt is successful. If no fault occurs before the
reclaim time elapses, it is thought that fault is cleared. In this case, at the end
of reclaim time, reset time T_AR Reset is started. During reset time AR
function is blocked. If a new fault occurs before the reclaim time elapses, it
results in reset of the reclaim time and starting of next reclosing shot. This
procedure can be repeated until the maximum number of reclosure shots is
reached.

130
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

If none of the reclosing shots is successful, and therefore the fault is still
remained after the last shot, final trip takes place. Furthermore, AR function
would be blocked for a time period defined by T_AR Reset, and
annunciation AR Failure is issued.

It is possible to block AR function for a specified time after any manual closing
command. This can be achieved by marshaling CB close command to binary
input BI4/MC CLS. When the binary input is activated, the IED is informed
about execution of a manual closing. As a result, AR function would be
blocked for T_AR Reset.

Furthermore, AR function would be blocked if the IED detects an abnormal


condition in CB control circuit. This means that if both binary inputs 3Ph CB
Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or inactivate at the same time, AR
function is blocked until the abnormal condition disappears.

There may be cases when it is already obvious that CB cannot perform any
reclosing attempt. For such cases, binary input BI2/CB Faulty is considered
which indicates that CB is not ready for reclosing. CB Faulty should be
checked with a time delay T_CB Faulty, which is set according to the
characteristic of circuit breaker. AR function would be blocked if the IED
detects activation of BI2/CB Faulty, even the AR function would not be
initiated. AR is blocked until the BI disappears. Furthermore, this condition is
checked whenever a close command is received from AR function.

Single-shot reclosure

When an internal or external trip command initiates AR function, the reclosing


program is being executed. First of all, CB auxiliary contact is checked to be
open until expiration of monitoring time T_Max. CB Open. If during this time,
CB open status is recognized, dead time is started. When dead time interval
T_3P AR1 has elapsed, monitoring time T_MaxSynExt is started. During
this period, whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for
T_Syn Chk, a closing pulse signal is issued. At the same time, reclaim time
T_Reclaim is started. If a new fault occurs before the reclaim time elapses,
AR function is blocked causing final tripping of CB. However, if no fault occurs
before reclaim time expires, AR is reset and therefore is ready for future
reclosing attempt for the next fault.

Multi-shot reclosure

In this condition, the first reclosing shot, in principle, is same as the


single-shot auto reclosing. If the first reclosing is unsuccessful, it doesnt
result in a final trip. Therefore if a fault occurs during reclaim time of the first

131
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

reclosing shot; it would result in the starting of next reclosing shot with
different dead time. This procedure can be repeated until the whole reclosing
shots which are set inside the IED is performed. Different dead times can be
set for various shots of AR function. This can be performed through settings
T_3P AR1, T_3P AR2, T_3P AR3 and T_3P AR4. If one of the preset
reclosure shots is successful, AR function would be reset after expiration of
the reclaim time. However, if none of reclosing shots is successful, i.e. the
fault doesnt disappear after the last programmed shot, a final trip is issued,
and reclosing attempts are announced to be unsuccessful. Figure 39
illustrates the operation method of two shots reclosure.

Trip Command

CB Open

AR Initiate

Dead time 1 Dead time 2


Close Command

Reclaim time < Reclaim time Reclaim time

Figure 39 Timing diagram showing two reclosure shots, first unsuccessful, second
successful

1.3 Input and output signals

132
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

IP1 AR Close
IP2 AR Not Ready
IP3 AR Final Trip
UP1 AR Successful
UP2 AR Fail
UP3
UP4
BI1/AR Off
BI2/CB Faulty
BI3/Init AR
BI4/MC CLS

BI8 CB Open
BI9 CB Close

Table 99 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3
UP4 signal for voltage input 4

Table 100 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI1/AR Off Binary input 1/AR function off
BI2/CB Faulty Binary input 2/CB Faulty
BI3/Init AR Binary input 3/Initiation AR function
BI4/MC CLS Binary input 4/manual closing
MC/AR Block AR block
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB Open
BI9 CB Close Binary input 9 CB Close

Table 101 Binary output list

Signal Description
AR Close AR Close
AR Not Ready AR Not Ready
AR Final Trip AR Final Trip
AR Successful AR Successful

133
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

AR Fail AR Fail

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 102 Function setting list for auto-reclosing function

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Time delay setting for shot 1
1. 0.5 T_3P AR1 dead time of three phase S 0.05 60.00
autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 2
2. 0.5 T_3P AR2 dead time of three phase S 0.05 60.00
autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 3
3. 0.5 T_3P AR3 dead time of three phase S 0.05 60.00
autoreclosing
Time delay setting for shot 4
4. 0.5 T_3P AR4 dead time of three phase S 0.05 60.00
autoreclosing
The number of autoreclosing
5. 4 Times_AR 1.00 4.00
shots
Time setting for
6. 3 T_Reclaim S 0.05 60.00
autoreclosing reclaim time
7. 3 T_AR Reset Time setting for AR resting S 0.05 60.00
Maximum time setting for CB
8. 0.1 T_Max. CB Open S 0.05 60.00
open
Time for synchro-check
9. 500 T_Syn Chk S 0.05 60.00
function
Maximum time for extension
10. 0.1 T_MaxSynExt S 0.05 60.00
of synchronization check
Phase determination setting
11. 1 Phase_UL 1.00 6.00
for syncho-check reference
Angle difference for
12. 10 Angle_Syn Diff Degree 1.00 80.00
synchro-check function
Voltage difference for
13. 5 U_Syn Diff V 1.00 40.00
synchro-check function
Frequency difference for
14. 0.02 Freq_Syn Diff HZ 0.02 2.00
synchro-check function
15. 43 Umin_Syn Minimum voltage for V 60.00 130.0

134
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


synchronization check
Maximum voltage for
16. 17 Umax_Energ V 20.00 100.0
Energizing check
17. 10 T_CB Faulty Time setting for CB faulty S 0.10 60.00

Table 103 Logical linker list for auto-reclosing function

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


1. On Func_AR Enable or disable the auto-recloser function

Table 104 Binary setting list for auto-reclosing function

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


3.8 1 Synchrozination check mode
3.9 0 Energizing for DLLB check
mode
Energizing for LLDB check
Selection of AR check mode
mode
3.10 0
Energizing for DLDB check
mode
Override mode
Enable or disable the AR
5.0 0 OC1 Init AR Off function is initiated by stage 1
of overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR
5.1 0 OC2 Init AR Off function is initiated by stage 2
of overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by inverse
5.2 0 OC Inv Init AR Off
stage of overcurrent
protection
Enable or disable the AR
5.3 0 EF1 Init AR Off function is initiated by stage 1
of earth fault protection
Enable or disable the AR
5.4 0 EF2 Init AR Off function is initiated by stage 2
of earth fault protection
Enable or disable the AR
5.5 0 EF Inv Init AR Off function is initiated by inverse
stage of earth fault protection
Enable or disable the AR
5.6 0 SEF1 Init AR Off
function is initiated by stage 1

135
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by stage 2
5.7 0 SEF2 Init AR Off
of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by inverse
5.8 0 SEF Inv Init AR Off
stage of sensitive earth fault
protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by stage 1
5.9 0 NSOC1 Init AR Off
of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by stage 2
5.10 0 NSOC2 Init AR Off
of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by inverse
5.11 0 NSOC Inv Init AR Off
stage of negative sequence
overcurrent protection
Enable or disable the AR
function is initiated by single
5.15 0 3P Fault Init AR 3P Fault Blk AR
phase fault or three phase
fault

1.5 IED reports

Table 105 Event information list

Information Description
AR in progess AR is initiated by internal or external function
Syn Request Check synchronization
Syn OK Synchronization check OK
1st Reclose The first shot reclosing
2nd Reclose The second shot reclosing
3rd Reclose The third shot reclosing
4th Reclose The fourth shot reclosing
AR Success AR successful
AR Failure AR unsuccessful

136
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

Information Description
Syn Vdiff fail Voltage difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Ang fail Angle difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Fdiff fail Frequency difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Failure Synchronization check timeout

Table 106 Alarm information list

Information Description
CB Not Ready BI2 is active to show CB is not ready

1.6 Technical data

Table 107 Technical data for autoreclosing function

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Number of reclosing shots Up to 4
Shot 1 to 4 is individually
selectable
AR initiating functions Internal protection functions
External binary input

Dead time, separated setting for 0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s 1 % setting value or +50 ms
shots 1 to 4
Reclaim time 0.50 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s
Blocking duration time (AR reset 0.05 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s
time)
Circuit breaker ready supervision 0.50 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s
time

Dead time extension for 0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s


synch-check (Max. SYNT EXT)

137
Chapter 15 Auto-reclosing function

138
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for unbalance protection function.

139
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

1 Unbalance protection

1.1 Introduction

The purpose of an unbalance detection scheme is to remove a capacitor bank


from the system in the event of a fuse operation. This will prevent damaging
overvoltages across the remaining capacitor units in the group where the fuse
operation occurs, to protect against the situation that can be immediately
harmful to the capacitor units or associated equipments.

1.2 Protection principle

Unbalance detection works scheme is set to issue an alarm signal for an


initial failure in a bank. If the critical failure happens, the capacitor bank would
be tripped from the line.

Unbalance detection based on unbalance current or unbalance voltage, This


IED provides three analog channels to monitor unbalance status. If only one
unbalance analog quantity input is provided, other two channels can be
reserved. In order to avoid mal-operating, auxiliary breaker contact is
necessary as a criterion.

Different detecting schemes are described in the following, which are applied
for the unbalance protection.

1.2.1 Unbalance protection detection for grounded capacitor


bank

A
B
C

I1

Figure 40 Example for grounded capacitor bank

140
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A grounded capacitor arrangement is shown here. The typical unbalance


protection scheme consists of a current transformer connected between
neutral point and ground.

It provides a relatively inexpensive protection scheme. But disadvantages are


included:

Sensitive to system unbalance

Don not operate when failure happen similarly in all the phases

1.2.2 Summation of intermediate tap-point voltage for


grounded-wye capacitor bank

A
B
C

U1

Figure 41 Example for grounded-wye capacitor bank

It shows a different unbalance protection scheme for a grounded wye


capacitor bank using capacitor tap point voltages. Any unbalance detected in
the capacitor units will cause an unbalance voltage at the tap points. The
resultant voltage in the open delta indicates the unbalance.

1.2.3 Neutral current differential protection for grounded


split-wye capacitor bank

141
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

I1

Figure 42 Example for split-wye capacitor bank

In this scheme, the neutrals of the two banks are grounded through separate
current transformers. The secondary current transformed by the CT is
insensitive to any outside conditions and is affected by two capacitor banks.
There is no any indication for balance failure in this configuration.

1.2.4 Neutral voltage unbalance protection for unrounded wye


capacitor bank

A
B
C

U1

Figure 43 Example for unrounded-wye capacitor bank

Using a voltage transformer connected between the neutral point and ground,
any neutral voltage shift due to the failure of capacitor unit is detected. This
scheme is less sensitive to system unbalance.

1.2.5 Neutral voltage unbalance detection by 3PTs for


unrounded wye capacitor bank

142
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1

Figure 44 Example for unrounded-wye capacitor bank with 3VTs

This protection scheme uses three lines to neutral VTs with the secondary
connected in the broken delta. It is less sensitive to system unbalance.

1.2.6 Neutral current protection for ungrounded split-wye


capacitor bank

A
B
C

Figure 45 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with CT

In this protection scheme, a current transformer is used in the neutral circuit


to measure the unbalance current. It is not sensitive to system unbalance but
sensitive to detection of capacitor unit failure.

1.2.7 Neutral voltage protection for ungrounded split-wye


capacitor bank

143
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1

Figure 46 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with VT

In this protection scheme, a voltage transformer is used in the neutral circuit


to measure the unbalance voltage. It is not sensitive to system unbalance but
sensitive to detection of capacitor unit failure.

1.2.8 Neutral voltage unbalance detection for ungrounded


split-wye capacitor bank

A
B
C

U1

Figure 47 Example for ungrounded split-wye capacitor bank with neutral VT

This scheme is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of


capacitor unit failures.

1.2.9 Three unbalance voltages detection for capacitor bank

144
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

A
B
C

U1

U2

U3

Figure 48 Example for three unbalance voltages detection

This scheme is applicable for either grounded or ungrounded capacitor bank,


it is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of capacitor
unit failure, fault occurrence in each capacitor unit can be detected reliably.

1.2.10 Three unbalance currents detection for capacitor bank

A
B
C

I1
I2
I3

Figure 49 Example for three unbalance currents detection

This scheme is applicable for either grounded or ungrounded capacitor bank,


it is not sensitive to system unbalance but sensitive to detection of capacitor
unit failure, fault occurrence in each capacitor unit can be detected reliably.

145
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

1.2.11 Logic diagram

Unbalance 1>

Unbalance 2> OR Func_UBL


AND Talarm Alarm
UBL Alarm On
Unbalance 3>

3Ph CB Open

Unbalance 1>

Unbalance 2> OR Func_UBL


AND Ttrip Trip
Unbalance 3>

3Ph CB Open

Figure 50 Logic diagram for unbalance protection

1.3 Input and output signals

IC1 UBL Alarm


IC2 UBL Trip
IC3
UC1
UC2
UC3

BI8 CB Open

Table 108 Analog input list

Signal Description
IC1 signal for current input 1
IC2 signal for current input 2
IC3 signal for current input 3
UC1 signal for voltage input 1
UC2 signal for voltage input 2
UC3 signal for voltage input 3

Table 109 Binary input list

146
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Signal Description
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB Open

Table 110 Binary output list

Signal Description
UBL Alarm Unbalance protection alarm
UBL Trip Unbalance protection trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 111 Function setting list for unbalance protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Voltage setting for alarm of unbalance
1. U_UBL Alarm V 0.50 100.0
protection
Current setting for alarm of unbalance
2. I_UBL Alarm A 0.10 20.0
protection
Time setting for alarm of unbalance
3. T_UBL Alarm S 0.10 60.00
protection
Voltage setting for tripping of unbalance
4. U_UBL Trip V 0.50 100.0
protection
Current setting for tripping of unbalance
5. I_UBL Trip A 0.10 20.0
protection
Time setting for tripping of unbalance
6. T_UBL Trip S 0.00 60.00
protection

Table 112 Logical linker list for thermal overload protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_UBL Enable or disable the unbalance protection

Table 113 Binary setting list for thermal overload protection

Bit 0 1 Explanation
Enable or disable the alarm
4.8 UBL Alarm Off UBL Alarm On
function of unbalance protection

1.5 IED reports


147
Chapter 16 Unbalance protection

Table 114 Event information list

Information Description
UBL Trip Unbalance protection issues trip command

Table 115 Alarm information list

Information Description
UBL Alarm Unbalance protection issues an alarm signal

148
Chapter 17 Under current protection

Chapter 17 Under current monitoring

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for under current monitoring function.

149
Chapter 17 Under current protection

1 Under current monitoring

1.1 Introduction

Under current protection is used to prevent reconnection of the charged


capacitor bank to energized network when a short loss of supply voltage
occurs.

Once under current protection operates, the CB closing circuit will be


interrupted and reset after a certain time. Additionally, time to resetting will be
displayed on the HMI.

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Function description

In order to inhibit reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live network,


reconnection inhibition function is provided. It should be activated when under
current protection operates. Output UC_BLOCK is issued and the inhibition
will last for T_Inhibition, this contact is used in series of close circuit to inhibit
reconnection by any reasons.

After timer T_Inhibition expiration, the closing inhibition will remove


automatically. Shortcut mode is provided in HMI to reset this timer and
remove closing inhibition in case of any emergency closing. Press QUIT and
SET at same time, inhibition is removed.

1.2.2 Logic diagram

Ia<

Func_UC
Ib< AND
AND T Trip
Ic<

3Ph CB Open

Figure 51 Logic diagram for under current monitoring function

150
Chapter 17 Under current protection

1.3 Input and output signals

IP1 UC Trip
IP2
IP3
BI8 CB Open

Table 116 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3

Table 117 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB Open

Table 118 Binary output list

Signal Description
UC Trip Under current monitoring function trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 119 Function setting list for under current monitoring function

NO. Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Current setting for under current
1. I_UC A 0.50In 20.00In
protection
Time setting for tripping of under
2. T_UC S 0.10 60.00
current protection
Time setting for inhibition of under
3. T_Inhibition S 30.00 6000.0
current protection

Table 120 Logical linker list for under current monitoring function

151
Chapter 17 Under current protection

NO. Abbr. Explanation


1. Func_UC Enable or disable the under current protection

1.5 IED reports

Table 121 Event information list

Information Description
UC Trip Under current protection issues trip command
Inhibit close Drive a contact to inhibit reconnection of capacitor

152
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for load shedding function.

153
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

1 Low frequency load shedding


protection

1.1 Introduction

The function monitors the network abnormality by detection of frequency


reduction. When the system frequency falls down to a threshold frequency
with following conditions satisfied, specified load will be removed.

Undervoltage checking

Rate of frequency (df/dt) checking

CB position checking

Load current checking

VT secondary circuit supervision

1.2 Protection principle

1.2.1 Function description

Low frequency load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding


principle. This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay
separately, instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip
command to various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the
low frequency load shedding protection functions applied at various bays can
be achieved by selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time
delay of the protection in various bays. The protection function can be
enabled or disabled via binary setting Func_LF LS. Based on the bay load
shedding principle, only one trip stage is applied for the protection. This
protection can operate based on both three-phase and single-phase voltage
input configurations. The voltage connection is set in the IED by binary setting
3Ph V Connect/1Ph V Connect. It is noted that in case of single-phase to
earth voltage input configuration, the voltage should be connected to phase A
or B, which are necessary for frequency measurement. Similarly, for single
phase to phase voltage, the voltage connection input should be VA-B. In each
configuration, it derives the power frequency from the connected voltage. If
the frequency falls below a pre-defined threshold (setting F_LF LS), a timer

154
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

begins to run toward a pre-defined time limit which is the time delay of the
protection (setting T_LF LS). When the time delay elapsed, the trip
command is issued.

Since the protection based on power frequency from the connected voltages,
the protection should be blocked if some conditions are satisfied as following:

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the defined threshold in setting U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

Load current is lower than setting I_Chk. This condition is mainly useful
when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. The setting
applied at I_Chk corresponds to minimum load current which may flow
when circuit breaker is closed. It is possible to disable this feature by
applying setting 0 to I_Chk

Circuit breaker is in open status. Similar to the previous condition, it is


useful when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. In this
case, it is not desired to issue any trip command by low frequency load
shedding even if the frequency falls below the pre-defined threshold

Rate of frequency change (f/t) exceeds the setting of frequency


change rate dF/dt_LS

1.3 Input and output signals

IP1 LF LS Trip
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

BI8 CB Open

Table 122 Analog input list

Signal Description

155
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

IP1 signal for current input 1


IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3

Table 123 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB open

Table 124 Binary output list

Signal Description
LF LS Trip Low frequency load shedding trip

1.4 Setting parameter

1.4.1 Setting list

Table 125 Function setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Frequency setting for low frequency
1. 49.5 F_LF LS HZ 45.00 60.00
load shedding protection
Time setting for low frequency load
2. 0.5 T_LF LS S 0.05 60.00
shedding protection
dF/dt setting for low frequency load
3. 3 dF/dt_LS HZ/S 1.00 10.00
shedding protection
Voltage checking setting for low
4. 70 U_Chk V 10.00 120.0
frequency load shedding protection
Current checking setting for low
5. 0.2In I_Chk A 0 2.00In
frequency load shedding protection

Table 126 Logical linker list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


Enable or disable the low frequency load shedding
1. On Func_LF LS
protection

156
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Table 127 Binary setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Single phase or three phase
2.9 0 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
3.4 1 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
setting of dF(dU)/dt

1.5 IED reports

Table 128 Event information list

Information Description
LF LS Trip Low frequency load shedding function issues trip command

157
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

2 Low voltage load shedding protection

2.1 Introduction

This kind of load shedding is to prevent the voltage collapse and uncontrolled
loss of load.

Low voltage load shedding is necessary when the network is connected with
a huge system with vast power capacity. Under this condition, Low
Frequency Load Shedding Scheme cannot work properly. Low Voltage Load
Shedding Scheme" would be a useful criterion whenever Automatic Voltages
Regulator (AVR) is out of service or not equipped with following conditions
satisfied.

Undervoltage checking

Negative sequence voltage checking

Rate of voltage (du/dt) checking

CB position checking

Load current checking

VT secondary circuit supervision

2.2 Protection principle

2.2.1 Funciton description

Low voltage load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding principle.
This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay separately,
instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip command to
various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the low voltage
load shedding protection functions applied at various bays can be achieved
by selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time delay of the
protection in various bays. The protection function can be enabled or disabled
via binary setting Func_LV LS. Based on the bay load shedding principle,
only one trip stage is provided for the protection. This protection can operate
based on both three-phase and single-phase voltage input configurations.
The voltage connection is set in the IED by binary setting 3Ph V
158
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Connect/1Ph V Connect. If all the measured voltages fall below a


pre-defined threshold (setting U_LV LS), a timer begins to run toward a
pre-defined limit which is the time delay of the protection (setting T_LV LS).
When the time delay elapsed, the trip command is issued. It is noted that the
setting applied at U_LV LS corresponds to phase to phase voltage.

Since the protection operates based on measured voltages, for some


conditions satisfied the protection should be blocked. These conditions are as
follows:

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the defined threshold U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

Load current is lower than setting I_Chk. This condition is mainly useful
when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. The setting
applied at I_Chk corresponds to minimum load current which may flow
when circuit breaker is closed. It is possible to disable this feature by
applying setting 0 to I_Chk

Circuit breaker is in open status. Similar to the previous condition, it is


useful when the voltage transformer is connected at source side. In this
case, it is not desired to issue any trip command by low voltage load
shedding even if the voltage falls below the pre-defined threshold

Rate of voltage change (U/t) exceeds the setting of voltage change


rate dU/dt_LS. The setting corresponds to phase to phase voltage

Negative sequence voltage is greater than 5V. In case of single-phase


voltage connection (by setting 1Ph V Connect), this condition is
useless.

2.3 Input and output signals

159
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

IP1 LV LS Trip
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

BI8 CB Open

Table 129 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3

Table 130 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB open

Table 131 Binary output list

Signal Description
LF LS Trip Low voltage load shedding trip

2.4 Setting parameter

2.4.1 Setting list

Table 132 Function setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Voltage setting for low voltage load
1. 100 U_LV LS V 50.00 110.00
shedding protection
Time setting for low voltage load
2. 1 T_LV LS S 0.05 60.00
shedding protection
3. 5 dU/dt_LS dF/dt setting for low voltage load HZ/S 1.00 10.00

160
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

shedding protection
Voltage checking setting for low
4. 70 U_Chk V 10.00 120.0
voltage load shedding protection
Current checking setting for low
5. 0.2In I_Chk A 0 2.00In
voltage load shedding protection

Table 133 Logical linker list for low frequency load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


Enable or disable the low voltage load shedding
1. On Func_LV LS
protection

Table 134 Binary setting list for low frequency load shedding protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Single phase or three phase
2.9 0 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
3.4 1 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
setting of dF(dU)/dt

2.5 IED reports

Table 135 Event information list

Information Description
Func_LV LS Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding

161
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

3 Overload load shedding protection

3.1 Introduction

The IED provides a load shedding function based on the load current passing
through feeder. This function will be essential in conditions that feeder is
connected to a huge network with constant frequency and additional AVR is
continuously used for voltage regulation. In this case, load shedding
protection should be done based on load current and monitoring of following
items

Undervoltage checking

Rate of voltage (du/dt) checking (in the case of voltage connection)

Rate of frequency (df/dt) checking (in the case of voltage connection)

VT secondary circuit supervision (in the case of voltage connection)

3.2 Protection principle

3.2.1 Fucntion description

Overload load shedding is provided based on bay load shedding principle.


This means that the protection function is implemented in each bay separately,
instead of being applied in an incoming bay and sending trip command to
various outgoing bays. In this regard, coordination between the overload load
shedding protection functions applied at various bays can be achieved by
selecting appropriate settings for pickup threshold and time delay of the
protection in various bays. The protection function can be enabled or disabled
via binary setting Func_OL LS. Based on the bay load shedding principle,
only one trip stage is provided for the protection. It operates based on the
measured phase currents. If all of the measured phase currents exceed a
pre-defined threshold (setting I_OL LS), a timer begins to run toward a
pre-defined limit which is the time delay of the protection (setting T_OL LS).
When the time delay elapsed, the trip command is issued.

If the voltage connected to the IED and the binary setting OL LS Chk V On is
set in binary setting OL LS Chk V Off/OL LS Chk V On, the protection would
be blocked as following conditions:

162
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

The minimum magnitude among of the connected voltages is lower than


the threshold defined by U_Chk. In case of single-phase voltage
connection, only the magnitude of the connected voltage is checked with
setting U_Chk

Rate of voltage change (U/t) exceeds the setting of voltage change


rate dU/dt_LS. The setting corresponds to phase to phase voltage

Rate of frequency change (f/t) exceeds the setting of frequency


change rate dF/dt_LS.

VT fail is detected by the IED or a MCB failure signal is received to the


IED through respective binary input

3.3 Input and output signals

IP1 OL LS Trip
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

BI8 CB Open

Table 136 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3

Table 137 Binary input list

Signal Description
BI8 CB Open Binary input 8 CB open

Table 138 Binary output list

Signal Description
163
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

OL LS Trip Overload load shedding trip

3.4 Setting parameter

3.4.1 Setting list

Table 139 Function setting list for overload load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Current setting for over load load
1. In I_OL LS V 50.00 110.00
shedding protection
Time setting for over load load
2. 1 T_OL LS S 0.05 60.00
shedding protection
dU/dt setting for over load load
3. 5 dU/dt_LS V/S 1.00 10.00
shedding protection
dF/dt setting for over load load
4. 3 dF/dt_LS HZ/S 1.00 10.00
shedding protection
Voltage checking setting for low
5. 70 U_Chk V 10.00 120.0
voltage load shedding protection

Table 140 Logical linker list for overload load shedding protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation


Enable or disable the low voltage load shedding
1. On Func_Lv LS
protection

Table 141 Binary setting list for overload load shedding protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Single phase or three phase
2.9 0 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
voltage connection
Enable or disable the binary
3.4 1 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
setting of dF(dU)/dt
Enable or disable the function
3.5 1 OL LS Chk V Off OL LS Chk V On
of checking voltage

3.5 IED reports

Table 142 Event information list

164
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

Information Description
OL LS Trip Overload load shedding function issues trip command

3.6 Technical data

Table 143 Technical data for load shedding protection

Item Rang or Value Tolerance


Under Frequency Load shedding
Frequency for fr =50Hz 45.50 to 50.00 Hz, step 0.01 Hz 20 mHz
Time delay 0.05 to 60.00s, step 0.01 1.5 % setting or +60 ms
Under Voltage Load shedding
Voltage 50 to 110 V, step 1V 3 % setting or 1 V
Time delay 1.5 % setting or +60 ms, at
0.10 to 60.00s, step 0.01 s
80% operating setting
Overload Load shedding
Phase current 0.08 to 20 A for Ir =1A 3% setting or 0.02Ir
0.25 to 100 A for Ir =5A
Time delay 0.10 to 60.00s , step 0.01 s 1.5 % setting or +60 ms, at
200% operating setting
Blocking condition
Frequency change rate f/t 1 to 10 Hz/s 0.5 Hz/s
Voltage change rate u/t 1 to 100 V/s, step 1 V/s 3 % setting or 1 V
Blocking voltage 10 to 120V, step 1 V 3 % setting or 1 V
Blocking current 0 to 2 Ir 3% setting or 0.02Ir
Operating time Approx. 60 ms
Reset time Approx. 60 ms
Under voltage blocking reset ratio Approx. 1

165
Chapter 18 Load shedding protection

166
Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection


scheme

About this chapter

This chapter introduces the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, logic diagram, IED report and technical data
used for fast busbar protection scheme.

167
Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

1 Fast busbar protection scheme

1.1 Function description

The IED provides fast busbar protection which is achieved based on


operation with GOOSE signals, it is able to block the incoming feeder
protection IED function by reception of a defined GOOSE signals from the
outgoing feeder linked with the same busbar.

The principle illustrated in the following figure:

A
Relay A

GOOSE massage-Block

Relay B

B
Trip

Relay C

Figure 52 Action when fault on the feeder C

If the fault occurs on outgoing feeder C, the protection IED C will trip and send
block messenger to IED A to block IED A relevant protection function.

168
Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

A
Relay A

Trip

Relay B

Relay C

Figure 53 Action when fault on the Busbar

Once the fault located on the busbar, protection IEDs of outgoing feeder do
not trip and therefore there is no any blocking signal. So the IED A will trip and
clear off the fault with short time delay.

1.2 Input and output signals

IP1
IP2
IP3
UP1
UP2
UP3

Table 144 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2

169
Chapter 19 Fast busbar protection scheme

IP3 signal for current input 3


UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3

1.3 Setting parameter

1.3.1 Setting list

1.4 IED reports

Table 145 Event information list

Information Description
OC Startup Three stages over current protections startup
OC Startup Back Three stages over current protections return

170
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Chapter 20 Secondary system


supervision

About this chapter

This chapter describes the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used in
secondary system supervision function.

171
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

1 Current circuit supervision

1.1 Function principle

1.1.1 Function description

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted


operation of many protection functions such as, earth fault current and
negative sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurring


open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.

To prevent the IED from wrong trip, interruptions in the secondary circuits of
current transformers is detected and reported by the UED. When the zero
sequence current is always larger than the setting value 3I0_CT Fail for 12s,
CT Fail will be reported and each stage of zero sequence current protection
will be blocked if setting Blk EF_CT Fail is selected.

1.1.2 Logic diagram

3I0> 12s CT Fail


CT Fail On

Figure 54 Logic diagram for current circuit supervision

1.2 Input and output signals

IP1 CT Fail
IP2
IP3
IN

Table 146 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1

172
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

IP2 signal for current input 2


IP3 signal for current input 3
IN signal for zero sequence current input

Table 147 Binary output list

Signal Description
CT Fail CT Fail

1.3 Setting parameter

1.3.1 Setting list

Table 148 Function setting list for current circuit supervision protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Maximum zero-sequence current for
1. 0.5In 3I0_CT Fail A 0.05In 2.00In
detecting CT failure

Table 149 Binary setting list for current circuit supervision protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Enable or disable the function
2.13 1 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
of CT fail supervising

1.4 IED reports

Table 150 Alarm information list

Information Description
CT Fail CT failure in circuit of current transformer

173
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

2 Fuse failure supervision VT

2.1 Introduction

A measured voltage failure, due to a broken conductor or a short circuit fault


in the secondary circuit of voltage transformer, may result in unwanted
operation of the protection functions which work based on voltage criteria. VT
failure supervision function is provided to block these protection functions and
enable the backup protection functions. The features of the function are as
follows:

Symmetrical/asymmetrical VT failure detection

3-phase AC voltage MCB monitoring

1-phase AC voltage MCB monitoring

Zero and negative sequence current monitoring

Applicable in solid grounded, compensated or isolated networks

2.2 Function principle

VT failure supervision function can be enabled or disabled through binary


setting VT Fail On/ VT Fail Off. By applying setting VT Fail On to the binary
setting, VT failure supervision function would monitor the voltage transformer
circuit. As mentioned, the function is able to detect single-phase broken,
two-phase broken or three-phase broken faults in secondary circuit of voltage
transformer, if a three-phase connection is applied.

There are three main criteria for VT failure detection; the first is dedicated to
detect three-phase broken faults. The second and third ones are to detect
single or two-phase broken faults in solid earthed and isolated/resistance
earthed systems, respectively. A precondition to meet these three criteria is
that IED should not be picked up and the calculated zero sequence and
negative sequence currents should be less than setting of 3I02_ VT Fail.
The criteria are as follows:

2.2.1 Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail

The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 as well as maximum of three


phase-to-earth voltages is less than the setting of Upe_VT Fail and at the
same time, maximum of three phase currents is higher than setting of I_ VT
Fail. This condition may correspond to three phase broken fault in secondary
174
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

circuit of the voltage transformer if no startup element has been detected.

2.2.2 Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail

The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
Upe_VT Fail. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken
fault in secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is
solidly earthed and no startup element has been detected.

The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
Upe_VT Fail, and at the same time, the difference between the maximum
and minimum phase-to-phase voltages is more than the setting of Upp_VT
Fail. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken fault in
secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is isolated
or resistance earthed and no startup element has been detected.

In addition to the mentioned conditions, IED has the capability to be informed


about the VT MCB failure through its binary inputs V3p MCB Fail and V1p
MCB Fail. In this context, VT fail is detected, if the respective binary input is
active.

2.2.3 The fourth voltage U4 VT fail

The IED is also capable to detect VT MCB failure of the forth input voltage U4
through its binary input V1P MCB Fail. In this context, VT fail is detected for
U4, if the respective binary input is active. As mentioned previously, U4 input
voltage can be used for in conjunction with reclosure function (setting 3U0
Calculated) or as 3U0 which can be used for earth fault protection or
displacement voltage protection (setting 3U0 Measured). When the fourth
input voltage is used as 3U0, activation of binary input V1P MCB Fail may
lead to block condition for the corresponding functions which operate based
on the measured 3U0 voltage. Similarly, when it is used as synchronization
purposes, activation of binary input V1P MCB Fail would result in blocking
condition for synchronization function.

2.2.4 Logic diagram

If VT failure supervision detects a failure in voltage transformer secondary


circuit, either by means of the above mentioned criteria or reception of a VT
MCB fail indication, all the protection functions which operate based on
direction component or low voltage criteria can be blocked, depending on the

175
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

setting. Furthermore, alarm report VT Fail is issued after 10s time delay. If
the VT Fail criteria recovers within this 10s time delay, the blocking condition
would be removed if one of the following conditions is met. Furthermore, it
should be noted that no VT MCB fail indication should be present during this
condition.

Without relay pickup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
Upe_VT Normal for 500ms. It is mentioned that with single phase
connection by setting 1-PH V Connect, only the connected voltage is
checked.

Without relay pickup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
Upe_VT Normal and at the same time, the calculated zero sequence or
negative sequence current of corresponding side becomes more than the
setting of 3I02_ VT Fail. It is mentioned that with single phase connection by
setting 1-PH V Connect, only the connected voltage is checked.

Subsequent to reporting VT fail alarm, the blocking condition of respective


protection functions would be removed if without relay pickup, the minimum
phase voltage becomes more than the setting of Upe_VT Normal for a
duration more than 10s. Furthermore, it should be noted that no VT MCB fail
indication should be present during this condition.

0
VT Chk CB Off
3Ph CB Open
VT Chk CB On
Max{Ua,Ub,Uc}< AND

3U0 <
Solid Earthed
3U0 >= OR

Isolate/Resist VT Fail On
OR 10S Alarm
AND
Max{Uab,Ubc,Uca}-
Min{Uab,Ubc,Uca}>
V3P MCB Fail VT Fail

Figure 55 VT Logic diagram of VT failure supervision for three phase voltage inputs

V1p MCB Fail 10S Alarm


VT Check On

V1p VT Fail

176
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Figure 56 VT Logic diagram of VT failure supervision for U4 input

2.3 Input and output signals

IP1 VT Fail
IP2 V1P VT Fail
IP3
IN
UP1
UP2
UP3
UP4
V3P MCB Fail
V1P MCB Fail

Table 151 Analog input list

Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1
IP2 signal for current input 2
IP3 signal for current input 3
IN Signal for zero sequence current input
UP1 signal for voltage input 1
UP2 signal for voltage input 2
UP3 signal for voltage input 3
UP4 signal for voltage input 4

Table 152 Binary input list

Signal Description
V3P MCB Fail Three phase MCB VT fail
V1P MCB Fail Single phase MCB VT fail

Table 153 Binary output list

Signal Description
VT Fail VT fail
V1P MCB Fail Single phase MCB VT fail

2.4 Setting parameter

2.4.1 Setting list

177
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Table 154 Function setting list for fuse failure supervision protection

NO. Default Abbr. Explanation Unit Min. Max.


Maximum current for detecting VT
1. 0.2In I_VT Fail A 0.05In 0.25In
failure
Maximum zero- and negative-
2. 0.2In 3I02_VT Fail sequence current for detecting VT A 0.05In 0.25In
failure
Maximum phase to earth voltage
3. 8 Upe_VT Fail V 7.00 20.0
for detecting VT failure
Maximum phase to phase voltage
4. 16 Upp_VT Fail V 10.00 30.0
for detecting VT failure
Minimum normal phase to earth
5. 40 Upe_VT Normal V 40.00 65.00
for VT restoring

Table 155 Binary setting list for fuse failure supervision protection

Bit Default 0 1 Explanation


Single phase or three phase
2.9 0 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
voltage connection
Solid earthed system or
2.10 0 Isolate/ Resist Solid earthed
isolated system
Enable or disable the function
2.15 1 VT Fail Off VT Fail On
of VT failure

2.5 IED reports

Table 156 Alarm information list

Information Description
VT Fail VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer
V1P VT Fail VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer

2.6 Technical data

Table 157 Technical data for VT secondary circuit supervision

Item Range or value Tolerances


Minimum current 0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A 3% setting or 0.02Ir

Minimum zero or negative 0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A 5% setting or 0.02Ir

sequence current

178
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

Maximum phase to earth voltage 7.0V to 20.0V, step 0.01V 3% setting or 1 V


Maximum phase to phase 10.0V to 30.0V, step 0.01V 3% setting or 1 V
voltage
Normal phase to earth voltage 40.0V to 65.0V, step 0.01V 3% setting or 1 V

179
Chapter 20 Secondary system supervision

180
Chapter 21 Monitoring function

Chapter 21 Monitoring function

About this chapter

This chapter describes the protection principle, input and output


signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used in
monitoring function.

181
Chapter 21 Monitoring function

1 Switching devices status monitoring


The function is used to monitor the service status of circuit breaker. The
conditions such as spring charging status, gas pressure, etc., are available
for the protection IED.

The AR function will be blocked and alarm will be issued in case of something
wrong with CB.

2 Self-supervision
All modules can perform self-supervision to its key hardware components
and program as soon as energizing. Parts of the modules are
self-supervised in real time. All internal faults or abnormal conditions will
initiate an alarm. The fatal faults among them will result in the whole IED
blocked

CRC checks for the setting, program and configuration, etc.

182
Chapter 22 Station communication

Chapter 22 Station communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a


SA-system.

183
Chapter 22 Station communication

1 Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to
one or many substation level systems or equipment.

Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

60870-5-103 communication protocol

The IED is able to connect to one or more substation level systems or


equipments simultaneously, through the communication ports with
communication protocols supported.

1.1 Protocol

1.1.1 IEC61850-8 communication protocol

IEC 61850-8-1 allows two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from
one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the
performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC


61850-8-1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control
information amongst themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That
is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify
those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by
publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can also request a control
action to be directed at any device in the network.

1.1.2 IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol

The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a


protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system.
This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit


serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC
terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave.
184
Chapter 22 Station communication

The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must


have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the
IEC60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103:
Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

1.2 Communication port

1.2.1 Front communication port

There is a serial RS232 port on the front plate of all the IEDs. Through this
port, the IED can be connected to the personal computer for setting, testing,
and configuration using the dedicated Sifang software tool.

1.2.2 RS485 communication ports

One isolated electrical RS485 communication ports are provided to connect


with substation automation system. These two ports can work in parallel for
IEC60870-5-103.

1.2.3 Ethernet communication ports

Up to 2 electrical or optical Ethernet communication ports are provided to


connect with substation automation system. These two ports can work in
parallel for one protocol, IEC61850 or IEC60870-5-103.

1.3 Technical data

Front communication port

Item Data
Number 1
Connection Isolated, RS232; front panel,
9-pin subminiature connector, for software tools
Communication speed 9600 baud
Max. length of communication cable 15 m

185
Chapter 22 Station communication

RS485 communication port

Item Data

Number 1, only
Connection 2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module
Max. length of communication cable 1.0 km
Test voltage 500 V AC against earth

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed Factory setting 9600 baud,
Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud

Ethernet communication port

Item Data
Electrical communication port
Number 0 to 3
Connection RJ45 connector
Rear port in communication module
Max. length of communication cable 100m

For IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed 100 Mbit/s
For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Communication speed 100 Mbit/s

Optical communication port ( optional )


Number 0 to 2
Connection SC connector
Rear port in communication module
Optical cable type Multi-mode

IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed 100 Mbit/s
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Communication speed 100 Mbit/s

Note: There is not optical Ethernet port in CSC211

Time synchronization

186
Chapter 22 Station communication

Item Data
Mode Pulse mode
IRIG-B signal format IRIG-B000
Connection 2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module
Voltage levels differential input

187
Chapter 22 Station communication

1.4 Typical substation communication scheme


The IED is able to connect to one or more substation level systems or
equipments simultaneously, through the communication ports with
communication protocols supported.

Server or Work Server or Work


Station 1 Station 2

Switch
Work Station 3

Net 1: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port A

Switch Net 2: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port B Switch


Switch

Gateway Switch
or
converter

Net 3: IEC103, RS485 Port A

Figure 57 Connection example for multi-networks of station automation system

1.5 Typical time synchronizing scheme


All IEDs feature a permanently integrated electrical time synchronization port
(shown in Figure 58). It can be used to feed timing telegrams in IRIG-B or
pulse format into the IEDs via time synchronization receivers. The IED can
adapt the second or minute pulse in the pulse mode automatically.

Meanwhile, SNTP network time synchronization can be applied.

SNTP IRIG-B Pulse

Ethernet port IRIG-B port Binary input

Figure 58 Time synchronizing modes


188
Chapter 23 Hardware

Chapter 23 Hardware

About this chapter

This chapter describes the IED hardware.

189
Chapter 23 Hardware

1 Introduction

1.1 IED structure

The enclosure for IED is 1/2 19 inches in width and 4U in height.

The IED is flush mounting with panel cutout and cabinet.

Connection terminals to other system on the rear.

The front panel of IED is aluminum alloy by founding in integer and


overturn downwards. LCD, LED and setting keys are mounted on the
panel. There is a serial interface on the panel suitable for connecting a
PC.

Draw-out modules for serviceability are fixed by lock component.

The modules can be combined through the bus on the rear board. Both
the IED and the other system can be combined through the rear
interfaces.

1.2 IED module arrangement

190
Chapter 23 Hardware

X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
PSM FOM FIO CPU BIO AIM AIM

Figure 59 Rear view of the protection IED

191
Chapter 23 Hardware

2 Local human-machine interface

2.1 Introduction

The human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand the whole


front plate is divided into zones, each of which has a well-defined
functionality:

1
4

7
5 6

Figure 60 The view of IED front plate

1. Liquid crystal display (LCD)

2. LEDs

3. Arrow keys

4. Reset key

5. Quit key

6. Set key

7. RS232 communication port

2.2 Liquid crystal display (LCD)

The LCD back light of HMI is blue, 5 lines can be displayed.


192
Chapter 23 Hardware

When operating keys are pressed or in the case of IED alarming or operating
report appearance, the back light will turn on automatically until the preset
time delay elapse after the latest operation or alarm.

2.3 LED

There are 11 LEDs on the left side of the LCD. The definition for each LED is
shown as following table.

Table 158 HMI keys on the front of the IED

NO. Definition Color Explanation


Green The IED operate nomally
1. Run/Alarm
Red The alarm is issued
Green The linker of overcurrent protection is enabled
2. OC
Red The overcurrent protection operate
Green The linker of earth fault protection is enabled
3. EF
Red The earth fault protection operate
Green The linker of sensitive earth fault protection is enabled
4. SEF
Red The sensitive earth fault protection operate
The linker of negative sequence overcurrent protection is
Green
5. NSOC enabled
Red The negative sequence overcurrent protection operate
The linker of circuit breaker failure or dead zone protection
Green
6. CBF/DZ is enabled
Red The circuit breaker failure or dead zone protection operate
Green The linker of thermal overload protection is enabled
7. Themal OL
Red The thermal overload protection operate
Green The linker of displacement voltage protection is enabled
8. 3V0
Red The displacement voltage protection operate
The linker of overvoltage or undervoltage protection is
Green
9. OV/UV enabled
Red The overvoltage or undervoltage protection operate
Green The linker of load shedding protection is enabled
10. Load SHED
Red The load shedding protection operate
The linker of autorecloser or manual reclose function is
Green
11. AR/MC enabled
Red The autorecloser or manual reclose function operate

2.4 Keyboard

193
Chapter 23 Hardware

The keyboard is used to monitor and operate IED. The keyboard has the
same look and feel in CSC family. As shown in Figure 60, keyboard is divided
into Arrow keys, Reset key, Quit key and Set key. The specific instructions on
the keys as the following table described:

Table 159 HMI keys on the front of the IED

Key Function
Up arrow key Move up in menu
Page up between screens
Increase value in setting
Down arrow key Move down in menu
Page down between screens
Decrease value in setting
Left arrow key Move left in menu
Right arrow key Move Right in menu
Reset key Reset the LEDs
Return to normal scrolling display state directly
Set key Enter main menu or submenu
Confirm the setting change
Quit key Back to previous menu
Cancel the current operation and back to previous menu
Return to scrolling display state
Lock or unlock current display in the scrolling display state (the
lock state is indicated by a "solid diamond" type icon on the botton
right corner of the LCD)

2.5 IED menu

2.5.1 Menu construction

194
Chapter 23 Hardware

Analog BI

Metering Connect
OpStatus
Energy GOOSEINF

GOO Ctrl GOOSESUB

Switch Time
OpConfig
Connect GOO Ctrl

Read Switch
Settings
Write Delete

Event Operation

Report Alarm Clear

Wave

MainMenu
Eth 1# Serial

ComConf Eth 2# Label

Monitor

BO Zero

BI Remote
Testing
LED Test TestMode

Accuracy

Module Print

DevSetup Remote Metering

SysParam Backlit

DevInfo Version OpInfo

Table 160 Full name for the menu

Sub-menu Full name Sub-sub menu Full name


Analog Analog
OpStatus Operation status
Metering Metering

195
Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub-menu Full name Sub-sub menu Full name


Energy Energy
GOO Ctrl GOOSE control
BI Binary input
Connect Connector
GOOSEINF COOSE information
GOOSESUB GOOSE subscribe
Switch Switch
Operation Connect Connector
OpConfig
configuration Time Time
GOO Ctrl GOOSE control
Read Read
Write write
Settings Settings
Switch Switch
Delete Delete
Event Event
Alarm Alarm
Report Report Wave Wave
Operation Operation
Clear Clear
Eth 1# Ethernet port 1
Eth 2# Ethernet port 2
Communication
ComConf Monitor Monitor
configuration
Serial Serial port
Label Label
BO Binary output
BI Binary input
LED Test LED Test
Testing Testing Accuracy Accuracy
Zero Zero drift
Remote Remote
TestMode Test mode
Module Module
Remote Remote
SysParam System parameter
DevSetup Device setup
Print Print
Metering Metering
Backlit Back light
DevInfo Device Version Version
information OpInfo Operation information

2.5.2 Operation status


196
Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Analog Read the analog input of the IED
Metering Read the measurement analog input of the IED
Energy Read the energy inputs of the IED
GOO Ctrl Read the status of the GOOSE connector
OpConfig
BI Read the status of binary inputs
Connect Read the status of the connector
GOOSEINF Read the transmission of the report
GOOSESUB Read the information of the GOOSE

2.5.3 Operation status

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Analog Read the analog input of the IED
Metering Read the measurement analog input of the IED
Energy Read the energy inputs of the IED
GOO Ctrl Read the status of the GOOSE connector
OpConfig
BI Read the status of binary inputs
Connect Read the status of the connector
GOOSEINF Read the transmission of the report
GOOSESUB Read the information of the GOOSE

2.5.4 Operation configuration

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Switch Switching setting group
Connect Enable or disable the protection function
OpConfig
Time Setting the current time of the IED
GOO Ctrl Function related GOOSE ON/OFF

2.5.5 Settings

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Read Read the settings
Write Set the settings
Settings
Switch Switch setting group
Delete Delete settings

2.5.6 Report

197
Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Event Display latest 40 event records
Alarm Display latest 40 alarm records
Wave Display latest 10 recording wave
Report
Operation Display latest 40 IED operation records
Clear all history reports saved by the IED and delete
Clear
unnecessary test records before IED operation.

2.5.7 Communication configuration

Sub menu Sub-sub menu Explanation


Eth 1# Set Ethernet port 1 in CPU module.
Eth 2# Set Ethernet port 2 in CPU module.
Monitor Set parameter related BIO module
ComConf Serial Serial 1 is used for SIO in panel, serial 2 is used for 485
port in CPU module and Serial 3 is reserved for dual
485 CPU module.
Label Set IED address (hex), STA name and Bay name

2.5.8 Testing

Sub menu Sub-sub Sub-sub-sub Explanation


menu menu
BO Test the binary outputs
BI Test the binary inputs
LED Test Test the panel LED
Test the analog quantites precision and
Accuracy
linearity
Zero View the zero drift
Event Report event report to monitor and SCADA
Alarm Report alarm report to monitor and SCADA
Testing Report the virtual SOE event to the monitor
Remote Signal
and SCADA
Report virtual remote measurement
Metering
over-limit event to the monitor and SCADA
The IED enters/exit test state, and it will not
send the event information to the local
TestMode monitor and remote communication under
the test state. The IED should exit the test
status after the test completed

198
Chapter 23 Hardware

2.5.9 Device setup

Sub menu Sub-sub Sub-sub-sub Explanation


menu menu
Hardware support is necessary, the setup
NetConf must be consistent with the hardware, and
LON/485/Ethernet are optional
The default is the soft connector mode, for
soft and hard combined mode, only the
Connect specific protection hard contact is provided,
Module
the other protection hard connector starts up
by default
BIO module setup depends on the practical
BIO
equipment
AI module setup depends on the practical
sql
equipment
Setup of CSC2000 protocol, identify the
CSC2000 communication requirement of this station
and practical hardware configuration
Setup of 103 protocol, identify the
Prot103 communication requirement of this station
and practical hardware configuration
Remote Setup of 61850 protocol, identify the
IEC61850 communication requirement of this station
DevSetup
and practical hardware configuration
Setup of signal, protocol version, report
Signal parameter and time synchronization, identify
the external condition of this station
Setup of the related parameters for external
Modify
conditions
SysParam
Load the default value when upgrade CPU
Default
program
Print Set network printer address
Adjust the compensation coefficient of the
Zero measurement module under the zero input
status
Scale Scale adjustment
Metering Confirm and save zero setup and scale
Save
setup
Clear the current memorized operation value
Reset of the measurement module (power and
impulse counter)
Backlit Set the back light to keep constant on or

199
Chapter 23 Hardware

Sub menu Sub-sub Sub-sub-sub Explanation


menu menu
automatically turn off when the keyboard is
free

2.5.10 Device information

Sub menu Sub-sub Sub-sub-sub Explanation


menu menu
Display the version of protection program,
Version protection scheme, HMI program, and IED
firmware.
DevInfo Display operation statistical data of the BIO
BIO Com
communication.
OpInfo
Display operation statistical data of the MMI
HMI
communication.

200
Chapter 23 Hardware

3 Analog input module

3.1 Introduction

The analogue input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers.

3 dedicated high accurate current transformers (optional) are used for


metering.

There are four kinds of AIM, Module A, Module B, Module C and Module D
series.

AIM A series provides up to 2 current input channels.

AIM B series provides up to 2 current input channels and 3 voltage input


channels.

AIM C series provides up to 5 current input channels.

AIM D series provides up to 6 current input channels and 4 voltage input


channels.

201
Chapter 23 Hardware

3.2 Terminals of analog input module

Terminals of Analogue Input Module A series

I01
I02
I03

Protection
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09
I10

I11 Metering
I12

Figure 61 Terminals arrangement of AIM A series

Table 161 Description of terminals of AIM A series

Analogue
Terminal Remark
Input
I01 I1 Star point
I02 I1
I03 Null
I04 Null
I05 Null
I06 Null
I07 Null
I08 Null
I09 Null
I10 Null
Star point,
I11 ImB
for metering
For
I12 ImB
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module B series


202
Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02
U03

Protection
U04
U05
U06
U07
U08
I09
I10

Metering
I11
I12

Figure 62 Terminals arrangement of AIM B series

Table 162 Description of terminals of AIM B series

Analogue
Terminal Remark
Input
I01 I1 Star point
I02 I1
U03 UC1 Star point
U04 UC1
U05 UC2 Star point
U06 UC2
U07 UC3 Star point
U08 UC3
I09 Null
I10 Null
Star point,
I11 ImB
for metering
For
I12 ImB
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module C series

203
Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02
I03

Protection
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09
I10

Metering
I11
I12

Figure 63 Terminals arrangement of AIM C series

Table 163 Description of terminals of AIM C series

Analogue
Terminal Remark
Input
I01 I1 Star point
I02 I1
I03 IC1 Star point
I04 IC1
I05 IC2 Star point
I06 IC2
I07 IC3 Star point
I08 IC3
I09 Null
I10 Null
Star point,
I11 ImB
for metering
For
I12 ImB
metering

Terminals of Analogue Input Module D series

204
Chapter 23 Hardware

I01
I02
I03

Protection
I04
I05
I06
I07
I08
I09

Metering
I10
I11
I12

3Ph voltage
U01
U02
U03
U04
1Ph voltage

U05

U06

Figure 64 Terminals arrangement of AIM D series

Table 164 Description of terminals AIM D-1 of AIM D series

Terminal Analogue Input Remark

I01 IA Star point


I02 IA
I03 IB Star point
I04 IB
I05 IC Star point
I06 IC
I07 I0 Star point
I08 I0
Star point
I09 ImA For
metering

205
Chapter 23 Hardware

ImA For
I10
metering
Star point
I11 ImC For
metering
For
I12 ImC
metering

Table 165 Description of terminals AIM D-2 of AIM D series

Terminal Definition Remark


U01 UA Star point
U02 UB Star point
U03 UC Star point
U04 UN
U05 U4 Star point
U06 U4

3.3 Technical data

Internal current transformer

Item Standard Data


Rated current Ir IEC 60255-1 1 or 5 A
Nominal current range 0.05 Ir to 30 Ir

Nominal current range of sensitive 0.005 to 1 A


CT
Power consumption (per phase) 0.1 VA at Ir = 1 A;
0.5 VA at Ir = 5 A
0.5 VA for sensitive CT
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-1 100 Ir for 1 s
IEC 60255-27 4 Ir continuous
Thermal overload capability for IEC 60255-27 100 A for 1 s
sensitive CT DL/T 478-2001 3 A continuous

Internal voltage transformer

Item Standard Data

206
Chapter 23 Hardware

Rated voltage Vr (ph-ph) IEC 60255-1 100 V /110 V


Nominal range (ph-e) 0.4 V to 120 V
Power consumption at Vr = 110 V IEC 60255-27 0.1 VA per phase
DL/T 478-2001
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-27 2 Vr, for 10s
(phase-neutral voltage) DL/T 478-2001 1.5 Vr, continuous

207
Chapter 23 Hardware

4 Fast binary Input & Output module

4.1 Introduction

In this module, the fast binary inputs are used to connect with the signals and
alarms. The fast binary outputs are used for the tripping outputs and initiating
outputs for protection functions, or signaling output.

4 binary inputs and 7 binary output relays are provided in this module.

4.2 Terminals of fast binary input & output module

208
Chapter 23 Hardware

01

Binary inputs
02

03

04

DC -
05

06

07
Relay 1

08
09
Relay 2

10
11
Relay 3
Binary outputs

12
13
Relay 4

14
15
Relay 5

16
17
Relay 6

18
19
Relay 7

20

Figure 65 Terminals arrangement of FIO

Table 166 Definition of terminals of FIO

Output
Terminal Definition
relay
01 Binary input 1
02 Binary input 2
03 Binary input 3
04 Binary input 4
Common terminal
05
for all binary inputs
209
Chapter 23 Hardware

above, connect with


DC negative
terminal
06 Null
07 Trip contact 1-1 Relay 1
08 Trip contact 1-0 Relay 1
09 Trip contact 2-1 Relay 2
10 Trip contact 2-0 Relay 2
11 Trip contact 3-1 Relay 3
12 Trip contact 3-0 Relay 3
13 Trip contact 4-1 Relay 4
14 Trip contact 4-0 Relay 4
15 Trip contact 5-1 Relay 5
16 Trip contact 5-0 Relay 5
17 Trip contact 6-1 Relay 6
18 Trip contact 6-0 Relay 6
19 Trip contact 7-1 Relay 7
20 Trip contact 7-0 Relay 7

4.3 Technical data

Binary inputs

Item Standard Data


Input voltage range IEC60255-1 110/125 V
220/250 V

Threshold1: guarantee IEC60255-1 154V, for 220/250V


operation 77V, for 110V/125V
Threshold2: uncertain operation IEC60255-1 132V, for 220/250V ;
66V, for 110V/125V
Response time/reset time IEC60255-1 Software provides de-bounce
time
Power consumption, energized IEC60255-1 Max. 0.5 W/input, 110V
Max. 1 W/input, 220V

Binary outputs
210
Chapter 23 Hardware

Item Standard Data


Max. system voltage IEC60255-1 250V /~
Current carrying capacity IEC60255-1 5 A continuous,
30A200ms ON, 15s OFF
Making capacity IEC60255-1 1100 W( ) at inductive load with
L/R>40 ms
1000 VA(AC)
Breaking capacity IEC60255-1 220V , 0.15A, at L/R40 ms
110V , 0.30A, at L/R40 ms

Mechanical endurance, Unloaded IEC60255-1 50,000,000 cycles (3 Hz switching


frequency)

Mechanical endurance, making IEC60255-1 1000 cycles

Mechanical endurance, breaking IEC60255-1 1000 cycles

Specification state verification IEC60255-1 UL/CSATV


IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Contact circuit resistance IEC60255-1 30m
measurement IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Open Contact insulation test (AC IEC60255-1 AC1000V 1min
Dielectric strength) IEC60255-27

Maximum temperature of parts and IEC60255-1 55


materials

211
Chapter 23 Hardware

5 Fast binary output module

5.1 Introduction

This module is used to provide fast tripping outputs and initiating outputs for
protection functions, and signaling output.

10 binary output relays with 10 contacts in 5 groups are provided in the FOM.

5.2 Terminals of fast binary output module

01

02
Relay 1
03

04
05

06
Relay 2
07

08
Binary outputs

09

10 Relay 3
11

12
13

14 Relay 4
15

16
17

18 Relay 5
19

20

Figure 66 Terminals arrangement of FOM

212
Chapter 23 Hardware

Table 167 Definition of terminals of FOM

Terminal Definition Output relay

01 Trip contact 1-1-1 Relay 1

02 Trip contact 1-1-0 Relay 1

03 Trip contact 1-2-1 Relay 1

04 Trip contact 1-2-0 Relay 1

05 Trip contact 2-1-1 Relay 2

06 Trip contact 2-1-0 Relay 2

07 Trip contact 2-2-1 Relay 2

08 Trip contact 2-2-0 Relay 2

09 Trip contact 3-1-1 Relay 3

10 Trip contact 3-1-0 Relay 3

11 Trip contact 3-2-1 Relay 3

12 Trip contact 3-2-0 Relay 3

13 Trip contact 4-1-1 Relay 4

14 Trip contact 4-1-0 Relay 4

15 Trip contact 4-2-1 Relay 4

16 Trip contact 4-2-0 Relay 4

17 Trip contact 5-1-1 Relay 5

18 Trip contact 5-1-0 Relay 5

19 Trip contact 5-2-1 Relay 5

20 Trip contact 5-2-0 Relay 5

213
Chapter 23 Hardware

6 Binary input & output module

6.1 Introduction

In this module, the output contacts are used for controlling and signaling
outputs mainly. The binary inputs are used to connect with the input signals
and alarms. 7 binary inputs and 9 binary output relays have been provided in
this module.

6.2 Terminals of binary & output module

214
Chapter 23 Hardware

01
Relay 1

02
Relay 2

03
04
Relay 3

05
06

Binary outputs
Relay 4

07
Relay 5

08
09
Relay 6

10
Relay 7

11
12
Relay 8

13
Relay 9

14
15

16

17
Binary inputs

18

19

20

21

DC -
22

Figure 67 Terminals arrangement of BIOTable 168 Definition of terminals of BIO

Terminal Definition Remark

Common
01 Contact group 1-0
terminal
02 Contact group 1-1 Relay 1

215
Chapter 23 Hardware

03 Contact group 1-2 Relay 2


04 Contact 2-0 Relay 3
05 Contact 2-1 Relay 3
Common
06 Contact group 3-0
terminal
07 Contact group 3-1 Relay 4
08 Contact group 3-2 Relay 5
Common
09 Contact group 4-0
terminal
10 Contact group 4-1 Relay 6
11 Contact group 4-2 Relay 7
Common
12 Contact group 5-0
terminal
13 Contact group 5-1 Relay 8
14 Contact group 5-2 Relay 9
15 Binary input 1
16 Binary input 2
17 Binary input 3
18 Binary input 4
19 Binary input 5
20 Binary input 6
21 Binary input 7
Common terminal
for all binary
22 inputs, connect
with AUX.DC
negative terminal

216
Chapter 23 Hardware

7 CPU module

7.1 Introduction

The CPU module handles all protection functions and logic, hardware
self-supervision and performs communication and information exchange
between the protection system and external equipments such as HMI, PC,
monitor, control system, substation automation system, engineer station,
RTU and printer, etc. Additionally, the CPU module transmits remote
metering, remote signaling, SOE, event reports and record data. The module
also provides binary inputs, synchronization and communication ports.

The pulse, IRIG-B or SNTP mode can be applied for time synchronization.

According to requirement, up to 2 isolated electrical or optical Ethernet ports


(optical Ethernet ports optional) and 1 RS485 serial communication port can
be provided to meet the demands of different substation automation system
and RTU at the same time.

There are 7 binary input channels with DC24V in the CPU module.

7.2 Terminals of CPU module

217
Chapter 23 Hardware

01

02

Binary inputs
03

04

05

06

07

08

Synchro
09

10 Time

11
COM

12
Ethernet ports

Figure 68 Terminals arrangement of CPU

Table 169 Definition of terminals of CPU

Terminal Definition

01 Binary input 1
02 Binary input 2
03 Binary input 3
04 Binary input 4
05 Binary input 5
06 Binary input 6
07 Binary input 7

218
Chapter 23 Hardware

08 Common terminal for all


binary inputs above, connect
with DC -24V. terminal
09 Time synchronization
10 Time synchronization GND
11 RS485 port - 1B
12 RS485 port - 1A
Ethernet Optional optical fiber or RJ45
Port A port for station automation
system
Ethernet Optional optical fiber or RJ45
Port B port for station automation
system

7.3 Technical data

Front communication port

Item Data
Number 1
Connection Isolated, RS232; front panel,
9-pin subminiature connector, for software tools

Communication speed 9600 baud


Max. length of communication cable 15 m

RS485 communication port

Item Data

Number 1, only
Connection 2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module
Max. length of communication cable 1.0 km
Test voltage 500 V AC against earth

For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Communication speed Factory setting 9600 baud,
Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud

219
Chapter 23 Hardware

Ethernet communication port

Item Data
Electrical communication port
Number 0 to 3
Connection RJ45 connector
Rear port in communication module
Max. length of communication cable 100m

For IEC 61850 protocol


Communication speed 100 Mbit/s
For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Communication speed 100 Mbit/s

Time synchronization

Item Data
Mode Pulse mode
IRIG-B signal format IRIG-B000

Connection 2-wire connector


Rear port in communication module
Voltage levels differential input

220
Chapter 23 Hardware

8 Power supply module

8.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and
full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. The module
provides 9 binary input channels as well.

8.2 Terminals of power supply module

221
Chapter 23 Hardware

01

02

03

04

Binary inputs
05

06

07

08

09

DC -
10

DC
DC 24V
11 output
24V +
DC
12
24V -

13
Alarm

Relay 1

14

15

DC+
16
Power input

input

17

DC-
18
input

19

20

Figure 69 Terminals arrangement of PSM

Table 170 Definition of terminals of PSM

Terminal Definition

222
Chapter 23 Hardware

01 Binary input 1
02 Binary input 2
03 Binary input 3
04 Binary input 4
05 Binary input 5
06 Binary input 6
07 Binary input 7
08 Binary input 8
09 Binary input 9
Common terminal for all
binary inputs above,
10
connect with AUX.DC
negative terminal
11 AUX.DC 24V+ output
12 AUX.DC 24V- output
13 Alarm contact (NC) 0
14 Alarm contact (NC) 1
15 Isolated terminal, not wired
16 AUX. power input 1, DC +
17 Isolated terminal, not wired
18 AUX. power input 2, DC -
19 Isolated terminal, not wired
20 Terminal for earthing

8.3 Technical data

Item Standard Data


Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux IEC60255-1 100 to 125V
195 to 250V
Permissible tolerance IEC60255-1 %20 Uaux
Power consumption at quiescent IEC60255-1 50 W per power supply module
state
Power consumption at maximum IEC60255-1 60 W per power supply module
load

Inrush Current IEC60255-1 T 5 ms/I 35 A

223
Chapter 23 Hardware

9 Technical data

9.1 Type tests

Insulation test

Item Standard Data


Over voltage category IEC60255-27 Category III
Pollution degree IEC60255-27 Degree 2
Insulation IEC60255-27 Basic insulation
Degree of protection (IP) IEC60255-27 Front plate: IP40
IEC 60529 Rear, side, top and bottom: IP 30
Power frequency high voltage IEC 60255-5 2KV, 50Hz
withstand test EN 60255-5 2.8kV
ANSI C37.90 between the following circuits:
GB/T 15145-2001 auxiliary power supply
DL/T 478-2001 CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
case earth
500V, 50Hz
between the following circuits:
Communication ports to case
earth
time synchronization terminals
to case earth
Impulse voltage test IEC60255-5 5kV (1.2/50s, 0.5J)
IEC 60255-27 If Ui63V
EN 60255-5 1kV if Ui<63V
ANSI C37.90 Tested between the following
GB/T 15145-2001 circuits:
DL/T 478-2001 auxiliary power supply
CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
case earth
Note: Ui: Rated voltage
Insulation resistance IEC60255-5 100 M at 500 V

224
Chapter 23 Hardware

IEC 60255-27
EN 60255-5
ANSI C37.90
GB/T 15145-2001
DL/T 478-2001

Protective bonding resistance IEC60255-27 0.1


Fire withstand/flammability IEC60255-27 Class V2

Electromagnetic compatibility tests

Item Standard Data


1 MHz burst immunity test IEC60255-22-1 Class III
IEC60255-26 2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM
IEC61000-4-18 Tested on the following circuits:
EN 60255-22-1 auxiliary power supply
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Level 4
IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV contact discharge;
EN 60255-22-2 15 kV air gap discharge;
both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 60255-22-3 Frequency sweep:
disturbance test EN 60255-22-3 80 MHz 1 GHz; 1.4 GHz 2.7 GHz
spot frequencies:
80 MHz; 160 MHz; 380 MHz; 450
MHz; 900 MHz; 1850 MHz; 2150
MHz
10 V/m
AM, 80%, 1 kHz
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 60255-22-3 Pulse-modulated
disturbance test EN 60255-22-3 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition rate
200 Hz, on duration 50 %

Electric fast transient/burst immunity IEC 60255-22-4, Class A, 4KV


test IEC 61000-4-4 Tested on the following circuits:
EN 60255-22-4 auxiliary power supply

225
Chapter 23 Hardware

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 CT / VT inputs


binary inputs
binary outputs
Class A, 1KV
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Surge immunity test IEC 60255-22-5 4.0kV L-E


IEC 61000-4-5 2.0kV L-L
Tested on the following circuits:
auxiliary power supply
CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
500V L-E
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports
Conduct immunity test IEC 60255-22-6 Frequency sweep: 150 kHz 80
IEC 61000-4-6 MHz
spot frequencies: 27 MHz and 68
MHz
10 V
AM, 80%, 1 kHz
Power frequency immunity test IEC60255-22-7 Class A
300 V CM
150 V DM
Power frequency magnetic field test IEC 61000-4-8 Level 4
30 A/m cont. / 300 A/m 1 s to 3 s

100 kHz burst immunity test IEC61000-4-18 2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM


Tested on the following circuits:
auxiliary power supply
CT / VT inputs
binary inputs
binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
communication ports

Mechanical tests

226
Chapter 23 Hardware

Item Standard Data


Sinusoidal Vibration response IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
test EN 60255-21-1 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm
60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay energized
Sinusoidal Vibration endurance IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
test EN 60255-21-1 10 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
20 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay non-energized
Shock response test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
EN 60255-21-2 5 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Relay energized
Shock withstand test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
EN 60255-21-2 15 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
Relay non-energized

Bump test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1


10 g, 16 ms duration
1000 shocks in both directions of 3
axes
Relay non-energized
Seismic test IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
X-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 7.5 mm
X-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :2 g
Y-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 3.75 mm
Y-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis,
Relay energized

Environmental tests

Item Data
Recommended permanent operating temperature -10 C to +55C
(Legibility of display may be impaired above
+55 C /+131 F)
Storage and transport temperature limit -25C to +70C

227
Chapter 23 Hardware

Permissible humidity 95 % of relative humidity

9.2 IED design

Item Data
Case size 4U1/2 19inch
Weight 5kg

9.3 CE certificate

Item Data
EN 61000-6-2 and EN61000-6-4 (EMC Council
EMC Directive
Directive 2004/108/EC)
Low voltage directive EN 60255-27 (Low-voltage directive 2006/95 EC).

228
Chapter 24 Appendix

Chapter 24 Appendix

About this chapter

This chapter describes the appendix.

229
Chapter 24 Appendix

1 General setting list

1.1 Setting list for CSC-211 M01

Table 171 Logical linker

Description Function
Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1
Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage


Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1
Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage


Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 1
Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage
Func_NSOC1 Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 1
Func_NSOC2 Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 2

Func_NSOC Inv Disable or enable the negative sequence over current inverse stage
Func_3V01 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1
Func_3V02 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2
Func_CBF Disable or enable the circuit breaker function
Func_ThermOL Disable or enable the thermal overload protection
Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1
Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2
Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1
Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2
Func_LF LS Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function
Func_LV LS Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function
Func_OL LS Disable or enable the overload load shedding function
Func_AR Disable or enable the auto-reclosing function
Func_MC Disable or enable the manual close function
Func_DZ Disable or enable the dead zone function

230
Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 172 Setting list

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
AR INITIATION 0000~FFFF
BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
U_OC_UnBlk 1.00~120.0 V Phase to phase
I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_OC Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_OC Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_OC 0.00~90.00 degree
3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_EF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_EF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_EF 0.00~90.00 degree
Angle_Neg 0.00~90.00 degree
I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
231
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
AK_SEF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_SEF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_SEF 0.00~90.00 degree
IsCOS_SEF 0.005~1.00 A
3I2_NSOC1 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_NSOC1 0.00~60.00 S
3I2_NSOC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_NSOC2 0.00~60.00 S
3I2_NSOC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_NSOC Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_NSOC Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_NSOC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
U_3V01 2.00~100.0 V
T_3V01 0.00~60.00 S
U_3V02 2.00~100.0 V
T_3V02 0.00~60.00 S
U_Phase low 10.00~100.0 V
U_Phase up 10.00~100.0 V
U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
I_Therm OL 0.10~10.00 A
T_Const Therm 6.0~9999 S
Ratio_Cool 0.100~10.00
Ratio_Alarm 0.500~1.000
F_LF LS 45.00~60.00 HZ
T_LF LS 0.05~60.00 S
232
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


U_LV LS 50.00~110.0 V
T_LV LS 0.10~60.00 S
I_OL LS 0.05~20.00 A
T_OL LS 0.10~60.00 S
dF/dt_LS 1.00~10.00 HZ/S
dU/dt_LS 1.00~100.0 V/S
T_3P AR1 0.05~60.00 S
T_3P AR2 0.05~60.00 S
T_3P AR3 0.05~60.00 S
T_3P AR4 0.05~60.00 S
Times_AR 1.00~4.00
T_Reclaim 0.05~60.00 S
T_AR Reset 0.05~60.00 S
T_Max. CB Open 0.05~60.00 S
T_Syn Chk 0.05~60.00 S
T_MaxSynExt 0.05~60.00 S
T_MaxSynReq 0.05~60.00 S
Phase_UL 1.00~6.00
Angle_Syn Diff 1.00~80.00 Degree
U_Syn Diff 1.00~40.00 V
Freq_Syn Diff 0.02~2.00 HZ
Umin_Syn 60.00~130.0 V
Umax_Energ 20.00~100.0 V
I_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
3I0_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
3I2_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
T_CBF1 0.00~60.00 S
T_CBF2 0.10~60.00 S
T_Dead Zone 0.00~60.00 S
U_Chk 10.00~120.0 V
I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
233
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table 173 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
1 OC1 V_Blk Off C1_V Blk On
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
4 OC2 V_Blk Off C2 V_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table 174 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 SOTF Off SOTF On
1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On
2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
5 Therm Alarm Off Therm Alarm On
6 Hot Curve Cold Curve
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 UnBlk Fun_VTFail Blk Fun_VTFail
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On
234
Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 175 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE
4 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
5 OL LS Chk V Off OL LS Chk V On
6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On
7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
8 Selection of AR check mode
9
10
11 Selection of MC check mode
12
13
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table 176 Selection of AR check mode

Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Mode


0 0 0 AR_Override
0 0 1 AR_Syn check
0 1 0 AR_EnergChkDLLB
0 1 1 AR_EnergChkLLDB
1 0 0 AR_EnergChkDLDB
1 0 1 Not used
1 1 0 Not used
1 1 1 Not used

Table 177 Selection of MC check mode

Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Mode


0 0 0 MC_Override
0 0 1 MC _Syn check
0 1 0 MC _EnergChkDLLB
0 1 1 MC _EnergChkLLDB
1 0 0 MC _EnergChkDLDB
1 0 1 Not used
1 1 0 Not used
235
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Mode


1 1 1 Not used

Table 178 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 NSOC1 Alarm NSOC1 Trip
8 NSOC Inv Alarm NSOC Inv Trip
9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip
10 3V02 Alarm 3V02 Trip
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table 179 Definition of control word AR INITIATION

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Init AR Off
1 OC2 Init AR Off
2 OC Inv Init AR Off
3 EF1 Init AR Off
4 EF2 Init AR Off
5 EF Inv Init AR Off
6 SEF1 Init AR Off
7 SEF2 Init AR Off
8 SEF Inv Init AR Off
9 NSOC1 Init AR Off
10 NSOC2 Init AR Off
11 NSOC Inv Init AR
12~14 Not used Not used
15 3P Fault Init AR 3P Fault Blk AR

Table 180 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


236
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6 Off 3V0 Trip
7 Off NSOC1&2 Trip
8 Off NSOC Inv Trip
9 Off Therm OL Trip
10 Off Load SHED
11 Off OV1 Trip
12 Off OV2 Trip
13 Off UV1 Trip
14 Off UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are
defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to
different protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will
initiate CBF function.

1.2 Setting list for CSC-211 M02

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description Function
Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1
Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage


Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1
Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage


Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1
Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage
Func_NSOC1 Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 1

237
Chapter 24 Appendix

Description Function
Func_NSOC2 Disable or enable the negative sequence over current stage 2

Func_NSOC Inv Disable or enable the negative sequence over current inverse stage
Func_3V01 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1
Func_3V02 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2
Func_CBF Disable or enable the circuit breaker function
Func_ThermOL Disable or enable the thermal overload protection
Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1
Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2
Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1
Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2
Func_MC Disable or enable the manual close funciton
Func_DZ Disable or enable the dead zone funciton
Table7-3 Setting list
NO. Description Scope Unit Note
1 Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
2 Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
3 Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
4 Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
5 BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
6 BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
7 BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
8 BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
9 BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
10 BO9 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
11 I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
12 T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
13 I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
14 T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
15 U_OC_UnBlk 1.00~120.0 V Phase to phase
16 Curve_OC Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
17 I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
18 K_OC Inv 0.05~999.0
19 A_OC Inv 0.005~200.0 S
20 B_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
21 P_OC Inv 0.005~10.00
22 Angle_OC 0.00~90.00 degree
23 3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A

238
Chapter 24 Appendix

24 T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
25 3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
26 T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
27 Curve_EF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
28 3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
29 K_EF Inv 0.05~999.0
30 A_EF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
31 B_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
32 P_EF Inv 0.005~10.00
33 Angle_EF 0.00~90.00 degree
34 Angle_Neg 0.00~90.00 degree
35 I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
36 3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
37 Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
38 Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
39 T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
40 I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
41 T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
42 I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
43 T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
44 Curve_SEF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
45 I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
46 K_SEF Inv 0.05~999.0
47 A_SEF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
48 B_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
49 P_SEF Inv 0.005~10.00
50 Angle_SEF 0.00~90.00 degree
51 IsCOS_SEF 0.005~1.00 A
52 U_3V0_SEF 2.00~100.0 V
53 3I2_NSOC1 (0.05~20.00)In A
54 T_NSOC1 0.00~60.00 S
55 3I2_NSOC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
56 T_NSOC2 0.00~60.00 S
57 Curve_NSOC Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
58 3I2_NSOC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
59 K_NSOC Inv 0.05~999.0
60 A_ NSOC Inv 0.005~200.0 S
61 B_ NSOC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
62 P_ NSOC Inv 0.005~10.00
63 U_3V01 2.00~100.0 V
239
Chapter 24 Appendix

64 T_3V01 0.00~60.00 S
65 U_3V02 2.00~100.0 V
66 T_3V02 0.00~60.00 S
67 U_Phase low 10.00~100.0 V
68 U_Phase up 10.00~100.0 V
69 U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
70 T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
71 U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
72 T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
73 Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
74 U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
75 T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
76 U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
77 T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
78 Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
79 I_Therm OL 0.10~10.00 A
80 T_Const Therm 6.0~9999 S
81 Ratio_Cool 0.100~10.00
82 Ratio_Alarm 0.500~1.000
83 T_AR Reset 0.05~60.00 S
84 T_Syn Chk 0.05~60.00 S
85 T_MaxSynExt 0.05~60.00 S
86 T_MaxSynReq 0.05~60.00 S
87 Phase_UL 1.00~6.00
88 Angle_Syn Diff 1.00~80.00 Degree
89 U_Syn Diff 1.00~40.00 V
90 Freq_Syn Diff 0.02~2.00 HZ
91 Umin_Syn 30.00~65.0(PE) V
60~130.0(PP)
92 Umax_Energ 10~50(PE) V
20.00~100.0(PP)
93 I_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
94 3I0_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
95 3I2_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
96 T_CBF1 0.00~60.00 S
97 T_CBF2 0.10~60.00 S
98 T_Dead Zone 0.00~60.00 S
99 U_Chk 10.00~120.0 V
100 I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
240
Chapter 24 Appendix

101 3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A


102 Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
103 Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
104 Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
105 I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
106 3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
107 T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
108 T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
109 T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
110 T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
111 Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
112 Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
1 OC1 V_Blk Off C1_V Blk On
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
4 OC2 V_Blk Off C2 V_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 SOTF Off SOTF On
1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On
2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
5 Therm Alarm Off Therm Alarm On

241
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
6 Hot Curve Cold Curve
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 UnBlk Fun_VTFail Blk Fun_VTFail
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On
7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
8 Not used Not used
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11
12 Selection of MC check mode
13
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-10 Selection of MC check mode


Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Mode
0 0 0 MC_Override
0 0 1 MC _Syn check
0 1 0 MC _EnergChkDLLB
0 1 1 MC _EnergChkLLDB
1 0 0 MC _EnergChkDLDB
1 0 1 Not used
1 1 0 Not used

242
Chapter 24 Appendix

1 1 1 Not used

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 NSOC1 Alarm NSOC1 Trip
8 NSOC Inv Alarm NSOC Inv Trip
9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip
10 3V02 Alarm 3V02 Trip
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6 Off 3V0 Trip
7 Off NSOC1&2 Trip
8 Off NSOC Inv Trip
9 Off Therm OL Trip
10 Not used Not used
11 Off OV1 Trip
12 Off OV2 Trip
13 Off UV1 Trip
14 Off UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as

243
Chapter 24 Appendix

BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is

designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.3 Setting list for CSC-211 M03

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description Function
Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1
Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage


Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1
Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage


Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1
Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage
Func_CBF Disable or enable the circuit breaker function
Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1
Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2
Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1
Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2
Func_LF LS Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function
Func_LV LS Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function
Func_OL LS Disable or enable the over load load shedding function
Func_AR Disable or enable the auto reclosure funciton
Func_MC Disable or enable the manual close funciton
Func_DZ Disable or enable the dead zone funciton
Table7-3 Setting list
NO. Description Scope Unit Note
1 Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
2 Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
3 Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
4 Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF

244
Chapter 24 Appendix

5 AR INITIATION 0000~FFFF
6 BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
7 BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
8 BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
9 BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
10 BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
11 I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
12 T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
13 I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
14 T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
15 U_OC_UnBlk 1.00~120.0 V Phase to phase
16 Curve_OC Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
17 I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
18 K_OC Inv 0.05~999.0
19 A_OC Inv 0.005~200.0 S
20 B_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
21 P_OC Inv 0.005~10.00
22 Angle_OC 0.00~90.00 degree
23 3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
24 T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
25 3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
26 T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
27 Curve_EF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
28 3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
29 K_EF Inv 0.05~999.0
30 A_EF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
31 B_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
32 P_EF Inv 0.005~10.00
33 Angle_EF 0.00~90.00 degree
34 Angle_Neg 0.00~90.00 degree
35 I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
36 3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
37 Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
38 Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
39 T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
40 I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
41 T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
42 I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
43 T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
44 Curve_SEF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
45 I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
245
Chapter 24 Appendix

(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
46 K_SEF Inv 0.05~999.0
47 A_SEF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
48 B_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
49 P_SEF Inv 0.005~10.00
50 Angle_SEF 0.00~90.00 degree
51 IsCOS_SEF 0.005~1.00 A
52 U_3V0_SEF 2.00~100.0 V
53 U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
54 T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
55 U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
56 T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
57 Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
58 U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
59 T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
60 U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
61 T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
62 Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
63 F_LF LS 45.00~60.00 HZ
64 T_LF LS 0.05~60.00 S
65 U_LV LS 50.00~110.0 V
66 T_LV LS 0.10~60.00 S
67 I_OL LS 0.05~20.00 A
68 T_OL LS 0.10~60.00 S
69 dF/dt_LS 1.00~10.00 HZ/S
70 dU/dt_LS 1.00~100.0 V/S
71 T_3P AR1 0.05~60.00 S
72 T_3P AR2 0.05~60.00 S
73 T_3P AR3 0.05~60.00 S
74 T_3P AR4 0.05~60.00 S
75 Times_AR 1.00~4.00
76 T_Reclaim 0.05~60.00 S
77 T_AR Reset 0.05~60.00 S
78 T_Max. CB Open 0.05~60.00 S
79 T_Syn Chk 0.05~60.00 S
80 T_MaxSynExt 0.05~60.00 S
81 T_MaxSynReq 0.05~60.00 S
82 Phase_UL 1.00~6.00
83 Angle_Syn Diff 1.00~80.00 Degree
246
Chapter 24 Appendix

84 U_Syn Diff 1.00~40.00 V


85 Freq_Syn Diff 0.02~2.00 HZ
86 Umin_Syn 30.00~65.0(PE) V
60~130.0(PP)
87 Umax_Energ 10~50(PE) V
20.00~100.0(PP)
88 I_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
89 3I0_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
90 3I2_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
91 T_CBF1 0.00~60.00 S
92 T_CBF2 0.10~60.00 S
93 T_Dead Zone 0.00~60.00 S
94 U_Chk 10.00~120.0 V
95 I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
96 3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
97 Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
98 Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
99 Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
100 I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
101 3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
102 T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
103 T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
104 T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
105 T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
106 Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
107 Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
1 OC1 V_Blk Off C1_V Blk On
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
4 OC2 V_Blk Off C2 V_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On

247
Chapter 24 Appendix

13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On


14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 SOTF Off SOTF On
1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On
2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 UnBlk Fun_VTFail Blk Fun_VTFail
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE
4 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
5 OL LS Chk V Off OL LS Chk V On
6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On
7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
8 Selection of AR check mode
9
10
11 Selection of MC check mode
12
13

248
Chapter 24 Appendix

14 Interlock Off Interlock On


15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-6 Selection of AR check mode


Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Mode
0 0 0 AR_Override
0 0 1 AR_Syn check
0 1 0 AR_EnergChkDLLB
0 1 1 AR_EnergChkLLDB
1 0 0 AR_EnergChkDLDB
1 0 1 Not used
1 1 0 Not used
1 1 1 Not used

Table7-10 Selection of MC check mode


Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Mode
0 0 0 MC_Override
0 0 1 MC _Syn check
0 1 0 MC _EnergChkDLLB
0 1 1 MC _EnergChkLLDB
1 0 0 MC _EnergChkDLDB
1 0 1 Not used
1 1 0 Not used
1 1 1 Not used

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip

249
Chapter 24 Appendix

13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On


14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table7-13 Definition of control word AR INITIATION


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Init AR Off
1 OC2 Init AR Off
2 OC Inv Init AR Off
3 EF1 Init AR Off
4 EF2 Init AR Off
5 EF Inv Init AR Off
6 SEF1 Init AR Off
7 SEF2 Init AR Off
8 SEF Inv Init AR Off
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 Not used Not used
12~14 Not used Not used
15 3P Fault Init AR 3P Fault Blk AR

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6~9 Not used Not used
10 Off Load SHED
11 Off OV1 Trip
12 Off OV2 Trip
13 Off UV1 Trip
14 Off UV2 Trip
Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as

BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is

designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.4 Setting list for CSC-211 M05


250
Chapter 24 Appendix

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description Function
Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1
Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage


Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1
Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage


Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1
Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage
Func_LF LS Disable or enable the low frequency load shedding function
Func_LV LS Disable or enable the low voltage load shedding function
Func_OL LS Disable or enable the over load load shedding function
Func_AR Disable or enable the auto reclosure funciton

Table7-3 Setting list


NO. Description Scope Unit Note
108 Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
109 Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
110 Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
111 Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
112 AR INITIATION 0000~FFFF
113 BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
114 BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
115 BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
116 BO4 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
117 BO5 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
118 BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
119 BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
120 BO8 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
121 I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
122 T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
123 I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
124 T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
125 Curve_OC Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
126 I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
127 K_OC Inv 0.05~999.0
251
Chapter 24 Appendix

128 A_OC Inv 0.005~200.0 S


129 B_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
130 P_OC Inv 0.005~10.00
131 3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
132 T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
133 3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
134 T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
135 Curve_EF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
136 3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
137 K_EF Inv 0.05~999.0
138 A_EF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
139 B_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
140 P_EF Inv 0.005~10.00
141 I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
142 3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
143 Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
144 Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
145 T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
146 I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
147 T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
148 I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
149 T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
150 Curve_SEF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
151 I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
152 K_SEF Inv 0.05~999.0
153 A_SEF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
154 B_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
155 P_SEF Inv 0.005~10.00
156 F_LF LS 45.00~60.00 HZ
157 T_LF LS 0.05~60.00 S
158 U_LV LS 50.00~110.0 V
159 T_LV LS 0.10~60.00 S
160 I_OL LS 0.05~20.00 A
161 T_OL LS 0.10~60.00 S
162 dF/dt_LS 1.00~10.00 HZ/S
163 dU/dt_LS 1.00~100.0 V/S
164 T_3P AR1 0.05~60.00 S
165 T_3P AR2 0.05~60.00 S
166 T_3P AR3 0.05~60.00 S
167 T_3P AR4 0.05~60.00 S
252
Chapter 24 Appendix

168 Times_AR 1.00~4.00


169 T_Reclaim 0.05~60.00 S
170 T_AR Reset 0.05~60.00 S
171 T_Max. CB Open 0.05~60.00 S
172 U_Chk 10.00~120.0 V
173 I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
174 3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
175 Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
176 Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
177 Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
178 I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
179 3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
180 T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
181 T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
182 T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
183 T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
184 Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
185 Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1


Bit 0 1
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 SOTF Off SOTF On
1 Not used Not used
2 Not used Not used
3 Not used Not used
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8 Not used Not used

253
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 Not used Not used
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit 0 1
0 Not used Not used
1 Not used Not used
2 Not used Not used
3 Not used Not used
4 dF(dU)/dt Off dF(dU)/dt On
5 OL LS Chk V Off OL LS Chk V On
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 Not used Not used
12 Not used Not used
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

254
Chapter 24 Appendix

Table7-13 Definition of control word AR INITIATION


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Init AR Off
1 OC2 Init AR Off
2 OC Inv Init AR Off
3 EF1 Init AR Off
4 EF2 Init AR Off
5 EF Inv Init AR Off
6 SEF1 Init AR Off
7 SEF2 Init AR Off
8 SEF Inv Init AR Off
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 Not used Not used
12~14 Not used Not used
15 3P Fault Init AR 3P Fault Blk AR

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6 Not used Not used
10 Off Load SHED
11 Not used Not used
12 Not used Not used
13 Not used Not used
14 Not used Not used
Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO4 Ctr Word, BO5 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr

Word ,BO8 Ctr Wordare defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed

to different protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

1.5 Setting list for CSC-211 M6

Table 181 logical linker

255
Chapter 24 Appendix

Description Function

Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage

Table 182 Setting list

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO8 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF A
BO9 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF S
I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_OC Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_OC Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_EF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_EF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
256
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
AK_SEF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_SEF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table 183 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit 0 1
0~1 Not used Not used
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3~4 Not used Not used
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 Not used Not used
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 Not used Not used
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 Not used Not used
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 Not used Not used
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 Not used Not used

Table 184 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

257
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
0 SOTF Off SOTF On
1~6 Not used Not used
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8~10 Not used Not used
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14~15 Not used Not used

Table 185 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit 0 1
0~13 Not used Not used
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table 186 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7~12 Not used Not used
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table 187 Definition of control word BO6 Ctr Word

Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip

258
Chapter 24 Appendix

Note: BO7 Ctr Word, BO8 Ctr Word, BO9 Ctr Word are defined the same
as BO6 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different
protections. Once a protection is designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF
function.

1.6 Setting list for CSC-211 V01

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description Function
Func_3V01 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1
Func_3V02 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2
Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1
Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2
Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1
Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2
Table7-3 Setting list
NO. Description Scope Unit Note
1 Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
2 Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
3 Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
4 BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
5 BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
6 BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
7 BO4 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
8 BO5 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
9 BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
10 BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
11 BO8Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
12 BO9 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
13 U_3V01 2.00~100.0 V
14 T_3V01 0.00~60.00 S
15 U_3V02 2.00~100.0 V
16 T_3V02 0.00~60.00 S
17 U_Phase low 10.00~100.0 V
18 U_Phase up 10.00~100.0 V
19 U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
20 T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
21 U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V

259
Chapter 24 Appendix

10.00~150.0(PP)
22 T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
23 Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
24 U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
25 T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
26 U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
27 T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
28 Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
29 Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
30 Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
31 Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
32 Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 Not used Not used
1 Not used Not used
2 Not used Not used
3 Not used Not used
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 VT Chk CB Off VT Chk CB On
12 Not used Not used
13 Not used Not used
14 Not used Not used
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE

260
Chapter 24 Appendix

4 Not used Not used


5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 Not used Not used
8
Not used
9
10
11
12 Not used
13
14 Not used Not used
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 Not used Not used
8 Not used Not used
9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip
10 3V02 Alarm 3V02 Trip
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
13 Not used Not used
14 Not used Not used
15 Not used Not used

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip

261
Chapter 24 Appendix

5 Off SEF Inv Trip


6 Off 3V0 Trip
6~10 Not used Not used
11 Off OV1 Trip
12 Off OV2 Trip
13 Off UV1 Trip
14 Off UV2 Trip
Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as

BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is

designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function

1.7 Setting list for CSC-211 C01

Table 188 Soft connector

Name Function

Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1

Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage

Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1

Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage

Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 1

Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sensitive earth fault inverse stage

Func_3V01 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 1

Func_3V02 Disable or enable the voltage displacement stage 2

Func_CBF Disable or enable the circuit breaker function

Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1

Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2

Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1

Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2

Func_UBL Disable or enable the unbalance function

Func_OL Disable or enable the over load function

Func_UC Disable or enable the under current function

262
Chapter 24 Appendix

Name Function

Func_DZ Disable or enable the dead zone function

Table 189 Setting list

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
U_OC_UnBlk 1.00~120.0 V Phase to phase
I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_OC Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_OC Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_OC 0.00~90.00 degree
3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
AK_EF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_EF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_EF 0.00~90.00 degree
Angle_Neg 0.00~90.00 degree
I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A

263
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
AK_SEF Inv 0.001~1000 S
P_SEF Inv 0.01~10.00
BK_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
Angle_SEF 0.00~90.00 degree
IsCOS_SEF 0.005~1.00 A
I_OL Alarm (0.05~20.00)In A
T_OL Alarm 0.10~6000.0 S
I_OL Trip (0.05~20.00)In A
T_OL Trip 0.10~6000.0 S
I_UC (0.05~20.00)In A
T_UC 0.100~60.00 S
T_Inhibition 30.00~6000.0 S
U_UBL Alarm 0.50~100.0 V
T_UBL Alarm 0.10~60.00 S
U_UBL Trip 0.50~100.0 V
T_UBL Trip 0.00~60.00 S
U_3V01 2.00~100.0 V
T_3V01 0.00~60.00 S
U_3V02 2.00~100.0 V
T_3V02 0.00~60.00 S
U_Phase low 10.00~100.0 V
U_Phase up 10.00~100.0 V
U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
264
Chapter 24 Appendix

NO. Description Scope Unit Note


Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
I_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
3I0_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
3I2_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
T_CBF1 0.00~60.00 S
T_CBF2 0.10~60.00 S
T_Dead Zone 0.00~60.00 S
I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V
Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table 190 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
1 OC1 V_Blk Off C1_V Blk On
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
4 OC2 V_Blk Off C2 V_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On

265
Chapter 24 Appendix

Table 191 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 Not used Not used
1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On
2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 UnBlk Fun_VTFail Blk Fun_VTFail
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table 192 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3

Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On
7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
8 Not used Not used
9 Not used Not used
10 Not used Not used
11 Not used Not used
12 Not used Not used
13 Not used Not used
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table 193 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4

266
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 OL Alarm Off OL Alarm On
8 UBL Alarm Off UBL Alarm On
9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip
10 3V02 Alarm 3V02 Trip
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table 194 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word

Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6 Off OL Trip
7 Off UC
8 Off UV Trip
9 Off OL Trip
10 Off OV1 Trip
11 Off OV2 Trip
12 Off UV1 Trip
13 Off UV2 Trip

Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word ,
BO9 Ctr Word are defined the same as BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs
can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is designated to
drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

267
Chapter 24 Appendix

1.8 Setting list for CSC-211 C02

Table7-2 Soft connector

Description Function
Func_OC1 Disable or enable the over current stage 1
Func_OC2 Disable or enable the over current stage 2

Func_OC Inv Disable or enable the over current inverse stage


Func_EF1 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 1
Func_EF2 Disable or enable the earth fault stage 2

Func_EF Inv Disable or enable the earth fault inverse stage


Func_SEF1 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 1
Func_SEF2 Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault stage 2

Func_SEF Inv Disable or enable the sentitive earth fault inverse stage
Func_3V01 Disable or enable the displacement voltage protection stage 1
Func_3V01 Disable or enable the displacement voltage protection stage 1
Func_CBF Disable or enable the circuit breaker function
Func_UV1 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 1
Func_UV2 Disable or enable the under voltage stage 2
Func_OV1 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 1
Func_OV2 Disable or enable the over voltage stage 2
Func_UBL Disable or enable unbalance detection function
Func_OL Disable or enable the over load function
Func_UC Disable or enable under current function
Func_DZ Disable or enable the dead zone funciton
Table7-3 Setting list
NO. Description Scope Unit Note
1 Ctr Word 1 0000~FFFF
2 Ctr Word 2 0000~FFFF
3 Ctr Word 3 0000~FFFF
4 Ctr Word 4 0000~FFFF
5 BO1 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
6 BO2 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
7 BO3 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
8 BO6 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF
9 BO7 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF

268
Chapter 24 Appendix

10 BO9 Ctr Word 0000~FFFF


11 I_OC1 (0.05~20.00)In A In=1A or 5A
12 T_OC1 0.00~60.00 S
13 I_OC2 (0.05~20.00)In A
14 T_OC2 0.00~60.00 S
15 U_OC_UnBlk 1.00~120.0 V Phase to phase
16 Curve_OC Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
17 I_OC Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
18 K_OC Inv 0.05~999.0
19 A_OC Inv 0.005~200.0 S
20 B_OC Inv 0.000~60.00 S
21 P_OC Inv 0.005~10.00
22 Angle_OC 0.00~90.00 degree
23 3I0_EF1 (0.05~20.00)In A
24 T_EF1 0.00~60.00 S
25 3I0_EF2 (0.05~20.00)In A
26 T_EF2 0.00~60.00 S
27 Curve_EF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
28 3I0_EF Inv (0.05~20.00)In A
29 K_EF Inv 0.05~999.0
30 A_EF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
31 B_EF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
32 P_EF Inv 0.005~10.00
33 Angle_EF 0.00~90.00 degree
34 Angle_Neg 0.00~90.00 degree
35 I_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
36 3I0_2H_UnBlk (0.25~20.00)In A
37 Ratio I2/I1 0.07~0.50
38 Ratio I02/I01 0.07~0.50
39 T2h_Cross_Blk 0.00~60.00 S
40 I_SEF1 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
41 T_SEF1 0.00~60.00 S
42 I_SEF2 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
43 T_SEF2 0.00~60.00 S
44 Curve_SEF Inv 1~12 Refer to table 7.3.4
45 I_SEF Inv 0.005~1.00(SEF) A
(0.05~20.00)In(Normal)
46 K_SEF Inv 0.05~999.0
47 A_SEF Inv 0.005~200.0 S
48 B_SEF Inv 0.000~60.00 S
49 P_SEF Inv 0.005~10.00
269
Chapter 24 Appendix

50 Angle_SEF 0.00~90.00 degree


51 IsCOS_SEF 0.005~1.00 A
52 U_3V0_SEF 2.00~100.0 V
53 I_OL_Alarm (0.05~20.00)In A
54 T_ OL_Alarm 0.100~6000.0 S
55 I_OL_Trip (0.05~20.00)In A
56 T_ OL_Trip 0.100~6000.0 S
57 I_UC (0.05~20.00)In A
58 T_UC 0.100~60.0 S
59 T_Inhibition 30.000~6000.0 S
60 I_UBL_Alarm 0.050~20.00 A
61 T_UBL_Alarm 0.100~60.00 S
62 I_UBL_Trip 0.050~20.00 A
63 T_UBL_Trip 0.100~60.00 S
64 U_3V01 2.00~100.0 V
65 T_3V01 0.00~60.00 S
66 U_3V02 2.00~100.0 V
67 T_3V02 0.00~60.00 S
68 U_Phase low 10.00~100.0 V
69 U_Phase up 10.00~100.0 V
70 U_UV1 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
71 T_UV1 0.00~120.0 S
72 U_UV2 5.00~75.0(PE) V
10.00~150.0(PP)
73 T_UV2 0.00~120.0 S
74 Dropout_UV 1.01~2.00
75 U_OV1 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
76 T_OV1 0.00~60.00 S
77 U_OV2 40.00~100.0(PE) V
80.00~200.0(PP)
78 T_OV2 0.00~60.00 S
79 Dropout_OV 0.90~0.99
80 I_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
81 3I0_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
82 3I2_CBF (0.05~20.00)In A
83 T_CBF1 0.00~60.00 S
84 T_CBF2 0.10~60.00 S
85 T_Dead Zone 0.00~60.00 S
86 I_Chk (0.00~2.00)In A
87 3I02_ VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
88 Upe_VT Fail 7.00~20.0 V
270
Chapter 24 Appendix

89 Upp_VT Fail 10.00~30.0 V


90 Upe_VT Normal 40.00~65.00 V
91 I_VT Fail (0.05~0.25)In A
92 3I0_CT Fail (0.05~2.00)In A
93 T_CB POS 0.10~60.00 S
94 T_DS POS 0.10~60.00 S
95 T_ES POS 0.10~60.00 S
96 T_CB Faulty 0.10~60.00 S
97 Ratio_Mea CT 0.001~7.00
98 Ratio_VT 0.01~2.00

Table7-4 Definition of control word Ctr Word 1


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Dir Off OC1 Dir On
1 OC1 V_Blk Off C1_V Blk On
2 OC1 2H_Blk Off C1 2H_Blk On
3 OC2 Dir Off OC2 Dir On
4 OC2 V_Blk Off C2 V_Blk On
5 OC2 2H_Blk Off C2 2H_Blk On
6 OC Inv Dir Off OC Inv Dir On
7 OCInv 2H_Blk Off OCInv 2H_Blk On
8 EF1 Dir Off EF1 Dir On
9 EF1 2H_Blk Off EF1 2H_Blk On
10 EF2 Dir Off EF2 Dir On
11 EF2 2H_Blk Off EF2 2H_Blk On
12 EF Inv Dir Off EF Inv Dir On
13 EFInv 2H_Blk Off EFInv 2H_Blk On
14 EF Chk I2/I1 EF Chk I02/I01
15 EF U2/I2 Dir Off EF U2/I2 Dir On

Table7-5 Definition of control word Ctr Word 2

Bit 0 1
0 Not used Not used
1 SEF1 Dir Off SEF1 Dir On
2 SEF2 Dir Off SEF2 Dir On
3 SEF Inv Dir Off SEF Inv Dir On
4 SEF Chk Iscos SEF Chk U0/I0
5 Not used Not used
6 Not used Not used
7 3I0 Measured 3I0 Calculated

271
Chapter 24 Appendix

Bit 0 1
8 3U0 Measured 3U0 Calculated
9 3Ph V Connect 1Ph V Connect
10 Isolate/Resist Solid earthed
11 Blk EF_CT Fail UnBlk EF_CT Fail
12 Not used Not used
13 CT Fail Off CT Fail On
14 UnBlk Fun_VTFail Blk Fun_VTFail
15 VT Fail Off VT Fail On

Table7-11 Definition of control word Ctr Word 3


Bit 0 1
0 UV Chk CB Off UV Chk CB On
1 UV Chk All Phase UV Chk One Phase
2 UV PP UV PE
3 OV PP OV PE
4 Not used Not used
5 Not used Not used
6 CBF Chk I0/2 Off CBF Chk I0/2 On
7 CBF Chk CB Off CBF Chk CB On
8 Not used
9
10
11 Not used
12
13
14 Interlock Off Interlock On
15 NR SetGrp Switch BI SetGrp Switch

Table7-12 Definition of control word Ctr Word 4


Bit 0 1
0 OC1 Alarm OC1 Trip
1 OC Inv Alarm OC Inv Trip
2 EF1 Alarm EF1 Trip
3 EF Inv Alarm EF Inv Trip
4 SEF1 Alarm SEF1 Trip
5 SEF2 Alarm SEF2 Trip
6 SEF Inv Alarm SEF Inv Trip
7 OL Alarm Off OL Alarm On
8 UBL Alarm Off UBL Alarm On

272
Chapter 24 Appendix

9 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip


10 3V01 Alarm 3V01 Trip
11 UV1 Alarm UV1 Trip
12 OV1 Alarm OV1 Trip
13 CB Faulty Off CB Faulty On
14 DS Faulty Off DS Faulty On
15 ES Faulty Off ES Faulty On

Table7-14 Definition of control word BO1 Ctr Word


Bit 0 1
0 Off OC1&2 Trip
1 Off OC Inv Trip
2 Off EF1&2 Trip
3 Off EF Inv Trip
4 Off SEF1&2 Trip
5 Off SEF Inv Trip
6 Off 3V0 Trip
7 Off UC
8 Off UBL Trip
9 Off OL Trip
10 Off OV1 Trip
11 Off OV2 Trip
12 Off UV1 Trip
13 Off UV2 Trip
14
Note: BO2 Ctr Word, BO3 Ctr Word, BO6 Ctr Word , BO7 Ctr Word are defined the same as
BO1 Ctr Word. Different outputs can be distributed to different protections. Once a protection is
designated to drive BO1, it will initiate CBF function.

273
Chapter 24 Appendix

274
Chapter 24 Appendix

2 General report list

2.1 Event report list

Table 195 Event report list for CSC-211 M1

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


1 Startup Protection startup
2 OC1 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command
3 OC2 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command
4 OC Inv Trip Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command
5 EF1 Trip Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
6 EF2 Trip Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
7 EF Inv Trip Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command
8 Inrush Blk Inrush current is checked to block function.
9 Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues trip
NSOC1 Trip
command
10 Negative sequence current protection stage 2 issues trip
NSOC2 Trip
command
11 Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues trip
NSOC Inv Trip
command
12 SEF1 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
13 SEF2 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
14 Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip
SEF Inv Trip
command
15 3V01 Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
16 3V02 Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
17 UV1 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
18 UV2 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
19 OV1 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
20 OV2 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
21 Therm OL Trip Thermal overload protection issues trip command
22 LF LS Trip Low frequency load shedding function issues trip command
23 LV LS Trip Low voltage load shedding function issues trip command
24 OL LS Trip Overload load shedding function issues trip command
25 1st Reclose The first shot reclosing
26 2nd Reclose The second shot reclosing
27 3rd Reclose The third shot reclosing
28 4th Reclose The fourth shot reclosing
29 AR in progress AR is initiated by internal or external function
30 Syn Request Synchronization check

275
Chapter 24 Appendix

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


31 Syn Ok Answer to AR to check synchronization successfully
32 AR Success AR successful
33 Syn Failure Fail to check synchronization in limited duration
34 AR Failure AR unsuccessful
35 Syn Vdiff fail Voltage difference checking fail
36 Syn Ang fail Angle difference checking fail
37 Syn Fdiff fail Frequency difference checking fail
38 CBF Initiate CBF function is initiated
39 CBF1 Trip The first stage CBF issues trip command
40 CBF2 Trip The second stage CBF issues trip command
41 Dead Zone Trip The dead zone function issues trip command
42 OC Startup Three stages overcurrent protections startup
43 OC Startup Back Three stages overcurrent protections return

Table 196 Event report list for CSC-211 M6

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


1 Startup Protection startup
2 OC1 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command
3 OC2 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command
4 OC Inv Trip Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command
5 EF1 Trip Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
6 EF2 Trip Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
7 EF Inv Trip Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command
8 Inrush Blk Inrush current is checked to block function.
9 SEF1 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
10 SEF2 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
11 Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip
SEF Inv Trip
command
12 OC Startup Three stages overcurrent protections startup
13 OC Startup Back Three stages overcurrent protections return

Table 197 Event report list for CSC-211 C1

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


1 Startup Protection startup
2 OC1 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues trip command
3 OC2 Trip Overcurrent protection stage 2 issues trip command
4 OC Inv Trip Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues trip command
5 EF1 Trip Earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
6 EF2 Trip Earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
7 EF Inv Trip Earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip command
276
Chapter 24 Appendix

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


8 Inrush Blk Inrush current is checked to block function.
9 SEF1 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues trip command
10 SEF2 Trip Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues trip command
11 Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues trip
SEF Inv Trip
command
12 3V01 Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
13 3V02 Trip Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
14 UV1 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
15 UV2 Trip Undervoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
16 OV1 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues trip command
17 OV2 Trip Overvoltage protection stage 2 issues trip command
18 UBL Trip Unbalance protection issues trip command
19 OL Initiate Overload protection issues trip command
20 UC Trip Under current protection issues trip command
21 CBF Initiate CBF function is initiated
22 CBF1 Trip The first stage CBF issues trip command
23 CBF2 Trip The second stage CBF issues trip command
24 Dead Zone Trip The dead zone function issues trip command
25 OC Startup Three stages over current protections startup
26 OC Startup Back Three stages over current protections return

2.2 Alarm report list

Two kinds of alarm report are included in the IED, which are shown in the
following table:

Alarm I is severe alarm. When alarm I happens, the alarm LED on the
front panel of the IED will flash, all of protection function will be out of
service and the trip power of protection will be blocked by the IED.

Alarm II is other alarm. When alarm II happens, the alarm LED on the
front panel of the IED will flash (except BI Set SetGr2 and BI Set
SetGr1), and will not block the trip power of protection.

Table 198 Alarm I list

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


1 AD Error AD is abnormal
2 BO Abnormal Binary output is abnormal
3 EPROM Error EPROM is abnormal
4 Flash Error Flash is abnormal
5 Invalid SetGr Pointer of setting group is error
277
Chapter 24 Appendix

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


6 Logic Scheme ERR Logic file and CPU file not cooperate
7 RAM Error RAM is abnormal
8 Setting Chk ERR Setting value is error
9 Zero Offset Zero deviation is out of limitation

Table 199 Alarm II list for M1

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm
1 3V01 Alarm
signal
Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues an alarm
2 3V02 Alarm
signal
3 BI Set SetGr1 Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1
4 BI Set SetGr2 Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0
5 BIO COM ERR Communication failure in BIO module
6 BIO OUT ERR BO error in BIO module
Both the 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or
7 CB Faulty
inactive
8 CB Not Ready BI2 is active to indicate CB is not ready
9 CT Fail Failure in circuit of current transformer
10 DS Faulty Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive
11 EF Inv Alarm Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal
12 EF1 Alarm Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
13 ES Faulty Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive
14 File ERR Read configuration files error
Frequency derived from software and hardware are
15 Frequency Differ
different by 0.5Hz
16 GOO_A_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE A
17 GOO_A_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE A
18 GOO_B_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE B
19 GOO_B_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE B
20 MMI Com Fail Communication failure between MMI module and CPU
Negative sequence current protection inverse stage issues
21 NSOC Inv Alarm
an alarm signal
Negative sequence current protection stage 1 issues an
22 NSOC1 Alarm
alarm signal
Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm
23 OC Inv Alarm
signal
24 OC1 Alarm Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
25 OV1 Alarm Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
26 PhA Grounded Phase A is grounded

278
Chapter 24 Appendix

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


27 PhB Grounded Phase B is grounded
28 PhC Grounded Phase C is grounded
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an
29 SEF Inv Alarm
alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm
30 SEF1 Alarm
signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
31 SEF2 Alarm
signal
32 Therm OL Alarm Thermal overload protection issues an alarm signal
33 Trip Fail Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s
34 UV1 Alarm Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
35 V1P VT Fail VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer
36 VT Fail VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer

Table 200 Alarm II list for M6

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


1 BI Set SetGr1 Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1
2 BI Set SetGr2 Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0
3 BIO COM ERR Communication failure in BIO module
4 BIO OUT ERR BO error in BIO module
Both the 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close are active or
5 CB Faulty
inactive
6 CT Fail Failure in circuit of current transformer
7 DS Faulty Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive
8 EF Inv Alarm Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal
9 EF1 Alarm Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
10 ES Faulty Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive
11 File ERR Read configuration files error
Frequency derived from software and hardware are
12 Frequency Differ
different by 0.5Hz
13 GOO_A_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE A
14 GOO_A_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE A
15 GOO_B_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE B
16 GOO_B_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE B
17 HMI Com Fail Communication failure between HMI module and CPU
Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm
18 OC Inv Alarm
signal
19 OC1 Alarm Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an
20 SEF Inv Alarm
alarm signal

279
Chapter 24 Appendix

Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm


21 SEF1 Alarm
signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
22 SEF2 Alarm
signal
23 Trip Fail Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s

Table 201 Alarm II list for C1

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


Displacement voltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm
1 3V01 Alarm
signal
Displacement voltage protection stage 2 issues an alarm
2 3V02 Alarm
signal
3 BI Set SetGr1 Setting group switches to 2 by binary input is 1
4 BI Set SetGr2 Setting group switches to 1 by binary input is 0
5 BIO COM ERR Communication failure in DIO module
6 BIO OUT ERR BO error in BIO module
Both 3Ph CB Open and 3Ph CB Close both active or
7 CB Faulty
inactive
8 CT Fail Failure in circuit of current transformer
9 DS Faulty Both DS Open and DS Close are active or inactive
10 EF Inv Alarm Earth fault protection inverse stage issues an alarm signal
11 EF1 Alarm Earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
12 ES Faulty Both ES Open and ES Close are active or inactive
13 File ERR Read configuration files wrong
Frequency derived from software and hardware are
14 Frequency Differ
different by 0.5Hz
15 GOO_A_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE A
16 GOO_A_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE A
17 GOO_B_CFG_ERR Configuration failure in GOOSE B
18 GOO_B_COMMU_ERR Communication failure in GOOSE B
19 HMI Com Fail Communication failure between HMI module and CPU
20 Inhibit close Drive a contact to inhibit reconnection of capacitor
Overcurrent protection inverse stage issues an alarm
21 OC Inv Alarm
signal
22 OC1 Alarm Overcurrent protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
23 OL Alarm Overload protection issues an alarm signal
24 OV1 Alarm Overvoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
25 PhA Grounded Phase A is grounded
26 PhB Grounded Phase B is grounded
27 PhC Grounded Phase C is grounded
28 SEF Inv Alarm Sensitive earth fault protection inverse stage issues an

280
Chapter 24 Appendix

No. Abbr. (LCD Display) Description


alarm signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 1 issues an alarm
29 SEF1 Alarm
signal
Sensitive earth fault protection stage 2 issues an alarm
30 SEF2 Alarm
signal
31 Trip Fail Trip command is issued lasting for more than 9s
32 UBL Alarm Unbalance protection issues an alarm signal
33 UV1 Alarm Undervoltage protection stage 1 issues an alarm signal
34 V1p VT Fail VT failure in circuit of the forth voltage transformer
35 VT Fail VT failure in circuit of voltage transformer

281
Chapter 24 Appendix

3 Typical connection
A. For incoming or outgoing feeder protection or line backup
protection

A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

Figure 70 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents

282
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

Figure 71 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
three phase voltages (bus side)

283
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

Figure 72 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
three phase voltages (line side)

284
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

Figure 73 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

285
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C
AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

Figure 74 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase and earth currents and
single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

286
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
I01
*
I1
I02

Figure 75 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current,
and sensitive earth current

287
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08
IN

AIM1
I01
*
I1
I02

Figure 76 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and three phase voltages (bus side)

288
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM1
* I01

I1
I02

Figure 77 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and three phase voltages (line side)

289
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I1
I02

Figure 78 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current
and sensitive earth current, and single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

290
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I1
I02

Figure 79 Application of feeder protection to measure three phase currents, earth current,
and sensitive earth current, and single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

291
Chapter 24 Appendix

B. For transformer backup protection


A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I02
I1

Figure 80 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current, and neutral current

292
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I02 I1

Figure 81 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and three phase voltages (bus side)

293
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM1
* I01

I02 I1

Figure 82 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and three phase voltages (line side)

294
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I02 I1

Figure 83 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and single phase voltage (Ph-Ph) (bus side)

295
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

AIM1
* I01

I02 I1

Figure 84 Application of transformer backup protection to measure three phase currents,


earth current and neutral current, and single phase voltage (Ph-E) (bus side)

296
Chapter 24 Appendix

C. For synch-check function

A
B
C

A
B
C

AIM2
U05

U4
U06

U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

Figure 85 Typical connection for synch-check on bus coupler applications

297
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

AIM2
U05

U4
U06

U01
UA
U02
UB
U03
UC
U04
UN

AIM2
I01
I02 IA
I03
I04 IB
* * * I05
I06 IC
I07
I08 IN

Figure 86 Typical connection for synch-check and feeder current protection

298
Chapter 24 Appendix

D. For capacitor bank protection

A
B
C

Capacitor bank AIM1


* I03

I04 IC1
* I05

I06
IC2

* I07

I08 IC3

Figure 87 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced current protection with three
current inputs

A
B
C

Capacitor bank AIM1


U03
U04 UC1
U05

U06 UC2
U07

U08 UC3

Figure 88 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced voltage protection with three
voltage inputs

299
Chapter 24 Appendix

A
B
C

Capacitor bank AIM1


I03

I04 IC1
*
I05

I06
IC2

I07

I08 IC3

Figure 89 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced current protection with one
current input

A
B
C

AIM1
Capacitor bank U03
U04 UC1

U05

U06 UC2

U07

U08 UC3

Figure 90 Typical connection for capacitor bank unbalanced voltage protection with one
voltage input

300
Chapter 24 Appendix

A A
B B
C C

I1

I1
I2
Figure 91 Unbalanced current detection for
I3
grounded capacitor bank
Figure 94 Three unbalanced currents
A detection for capacitor bank
B
C
A
B
C

I1
U1

Figure 92 Neutral current differential


protection for grounded Split-Wye capacitor Figure 95 Neutral voltage unbalanced
bank protection for unrounded Wye capacitor
bank
A
B A
C B
C

I1
U1
Figure 93 Neutral current protection for
ungrounded split-Wye capacitor bank
Figure 96 Neutral voltage unbalanced
detection for ungrounded split-Wye
capacitor bank

301
Chapter 24 Appendix

A A
B B
C C

U1

U1
Figure 99 Neutral voltage protection for
ungrounded split-Wye capacitor bank
Figure 97 Summation of Intermediate
tap-point voltage for grounded Wye A
B
capacitor bank C

A
B
C

U1
U2
U3
U1

Figure 100 Three unbalanced voltages


detection for Capacitor Bank
Figure 98 Neutral voltage unbalance
detection by 3VTs for unrounded Wye
capacitor bank

302
Chapter 24 Appendix

E. For Load shedding function

CSC-211 CSC-211 CSC-211 CSC-211 CSC-211

Figure 101 Typical connection for load shedding function

303
Chapter 24 Appendix

4 Time inverse characteristic


4.1 11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time
characteristic curves
In the setting, if the curve number is set for inverse time characteristic, which
is corresponding to the characteristic curve in the following tabel. Both IEC
and ANSI based standard curves are available.

Table 202 11 kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristic

Curves No. IDMTL Curves Parameter A Parameter P Parameter B

1 IEC INV. 0.14 0.02 0

2 IEC VERY INV. 13.5 1.0 0

3 IEC EXTERMELY INV. 80.0 2.0 0

4 IEC LONG INV. 120.0 1.0 0

5 ANSI INV. 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966

6 ANSI SHORT INV. 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393

7 ANSI LONG INV. 5.6143 1 2.18592

8 ANSI MODERATELY
0.0103 0.02 0.0228
INV.

9 ANSI VERY INV. 3.922 2.0 0.0982

10 ANSI EXTERMELY INV. 5.64 2.0 0.02434

11 ANSI DEFINITE INV. 0.4797 1.5625 0.21359

4.2 User defined characteristic


For the inverse time characteristic, also can be set as user defined
characteristic if the setting is set to 12.

Equation 11

304
Chapter 24 Appendix

where:

A: Time factor for inverse time stage

B: Delay time for inverse time stage

P: index for inverse time stage

T: Set time multiplier for step n

4.3 Typical inverse curves

305
Chapter 24 Appendix

The typical 11 curves where K=0.025 is shown in the following figure:

IEC & ANSI Curve


(K=0.025)
10

0.1 IEC INV.


Time in Seconds

IEC VERY INV.


IEC EXTE INV.
IEC LONG INV.
ANSI INV.
ANSI SHORT INV.
ANSI LONG INV.
ANSI MODE INV.
0.01
ANSI VERY INV.
ANSI EXTE INV.
ANSI DEFI INV.

0.001

0.0001
1 10 100
Id/I_Inv

Figure 102 Typical curves for IEC and ANSI standard

306
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC INV. Curve in the
following figure:

IEC INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1.0
K=1.25

0.1

0.01
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 103 Typical IEC INV. Curves

307
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC VERY INV. Curve in
the following figure:

IEC VERY INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 104 Typical IEC VERY INV. Curves

308
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC EXTREMELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

IEC EXTREMELY INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 105 Typical IEC EXTREMELY INV. Curve

309
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the IEC LONG INV. Curve in
the following figure:

IEC LONG INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.1

0.01
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 106 Typical IEC LONG INV. Curve

310
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ASNI INV. Curve in the
following figure:

ANSI INV. Curve

10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100

I/Is

Figure 107 Typical ANSI INV. Curves

311
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI SHOTR INV. Curve
in the following figure:

ANSI SHORT INV.Curve


10

0.1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5
0.01

0.001
1 10 100

0.0001
I/Is

Figure 108 Typical ANSI SHORT INV. Curves

312
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI LONG INV. Curve in
the following figure:

ANSI LONG INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.1

0.01
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 109 Typical ANSI LONG INV. Curves

313
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI MODETATELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI MODERATELY INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 110 Typical ANSI MODETATELY INV. Curve

314
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSIVERY INV. Curve in
the following figure:

ANSI VERY INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 111 Typical ANSI VERY INV. Curves

315
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI EXTREMELY INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI EXTREMELY INV. Curve


10

0.1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
0.01
K=1.5

0.001
1 10 100

0.0001
I/Is

Figure 112 Typical ANSI EXTREMELY INV. Curves

316
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where K=0.025, K=0.2, K=0.5, K=1 and K=1.5 the ANSI DEFINITE INV.
Curve in the following figure:

ANSI DEFINITE INV. Curve


10

1
Time in Seconds

K=0.025
0.1 K=0.2
K=0.5
K=1
K=1.5

0.01

0.001
1 10 100
I/Is

Figure 113 Typical ANSI DEFINITE INV. Curves

5 CT Requirement
5.1 Overview
317
Chapter 24 Appendix

In practice, the conventional magnetic- core current transformer (hereinafter


as referred CT) is not able to transform the current signal accurately in whole
fault period of all possible faults because of manufactured cost and
installation space limited. CT Saturation will cause distortion of the current
signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Although more and more protection IEDs have been
designed to permit CT saturation with maintained correct operation, the
performance of protection IED is still depended on the correct selection of CT.

5.2 Current transformer classification


The conventional CTs are usually manufactured in accordance with the
standard, IEC 60044, ANSI / IEEE C57.13, ANSI / IEEE C37.110 or other
comparable standards, which CTs are specified in different protection class.

Currently, the CT for protection are classified according to functional


performance as follows:

Class P CT

Accuracy limit defined by composite error with steady symmetric primary


current. No limit for remanent flux.

Class PR CT

CT with limited remanence factor for which, in some cased, a value of the
secondary loop time constant and/or a limiting value of the winding
resistance may also be specified.

Class PX CT

Low leakage reactance for which knowledge of the transformer


secondary excitation characteristic, secondary winding resistance,
secondary burden resistance and turns ratio is sufficient to assess its
performance in relation to the protective relay system with which it is to
be used.

Class TPS CT

Low leakage flux current transient transformer for which performance is


defined by the secondary excitation characteristics and turns ratio error
limits. No limit for remanent flux

Class TPX CT

Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified


transient duty cycle. No limit for remanent flux.

Class TPY CT

Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified

318
Chapter 24 Appendix

transient duty cycle. Remanent flux not to exceed 10% of the saturation
flux..

Class TPZ CT

Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous alternating current


component error during single energization with maximum d.c. offset at
specified secondary loop time constant. No requirements for d.c.
component error limit. Remanent flux to be practically negligible.

TPE class CT (TPE represents transient protection and electronic type


CT)

5.3 Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as


defined)
Abbrev. Description
Esl Rated secondary limiting e.m.f
Eal Rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f
Ek Rated knee point e.m.f
Uk Knee point voltage (r.m.s.)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor
Kssc Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
Kssc Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor
Kssc based on different Ipcf
Kpcf Protective checking factor
Ks Specified transient factor
Kx Dimensioning factor
Ktd Transient dimensioning factor
Ipn Rated primary current
Isn Rated secondary current
Ipsc Rated primary short-circuit current
Ipcf protective checking current
Isscmax Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current
Rct Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 C /
167 F (or other specified temperature)
Rb Rated resistive burden
Rb = Rlead + Rrelay = actual connected resistive
burden
Rs Total resistance of the secondary circuit,
inclusive of the secondary winding resistance
corrected to 75, unless otherwise specified,
and inclusive of all external burden connected.
Rlead Wire loop resistance
Zbn Rated relay burden

319
Chapter 24 Appendix

Zb Actual relay burden


Tp Specified primary time constant
Ts Secondary loop time constant

5.4 General current transformer requirements

5.4.1 Protective checking current

The current error of CT should be within the accuracy limit required at


specified fault current.

To verify the CT accuracy performance, Ipcf, primary protective checking


current, should be chose properly and carefully.

For different protections, Ipcf is the selected fault current in proper fault
position of the corresponding fault, which will flow through the verified CT.

To guarantee the reliability of protection relay, Ipcf should be the maximum


fault current at internal fault. E.g. maximum primary three phase short-circuit
fault current or single phase earth fault current depended on system
sequence impedance, in different positions.

Moreover, to guarantee the security of protection relay, Ipcf should be the


maximum fault current at external fault.

Last but not least, Ipcf calculation should be based on the future possible
system power capacity

Kpcf, protective checking factor, is always used to verified the CT


performance

To reduce the influence of transient state, Kalf, Accuracy limit factor of CT,
should be larger than the following requirement

Ks, Specified transient factor, should be decided based on actual operation


state and operation experiences by user.

5.4.2 CT class

320
Chapter 24 Appendix

The selected CT should guarantee that the error is within the required
accuracy limit at steady symmetric short circuit current. The influence of short
circuit current DC component and remanence should be considered, based
on extent of system transient influence, protection function characteristic,
consequence of transient saturation and actual operating experience. To fulfill
the requirement on a specified time to saturation, the rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f of CTs must higher than the required maximum equivalent
secondary e.m.f that is calculated based on actual application.

For the CTs applied to transmission line protection, transformer differential


protection with 330kV voltage level and above, and 300MW and above
generator-transformer set differential protection, the power system time
constant is so large that the CT is easy to saturate severely due to system
transient state. To prevent the CT from saturation at actual duty cycle, TP
class CT is preferred.

For TPS class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting e.m.f) is generally
determined as follows:

Where

Ks: Specified transient factor

Kssc: Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor

For TPX, TPY and TPZ class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting
e.m.f) is generally determined as follows:

Where

Ktd: Rated transient dimensioning factor

Considering at short circuit current with 100% offset

For C-t-O duty cycle,

t: duration of one duty cycle;

For C-t-O-tfr-C-t-O duty cycle,

t: duration of first duty cycle;

t: duration of second duty cycle;

321
Chapter 24 Appendix

tfr: duration between two duty cycle;

For the CTs applied to 110 - 220kV voltage level transmission line protection,
110 - 220kV voltage level transformer differential protection, 100-200MW
generator-transformer set differential protection, and large capacity motor
differential protection, the influence of system transient state to CT is so less
that the CT selection is based on system steady fault state mainly, and leave
proper margin to tolerate the negative effect of possible transient state.
Therefore, P, PR, PX class CT can be always applied.

For P class and PR class CT, Esl (the rated secondary limited e.m.f) is
generally determined as follows:

Kalf: Accuracy limit factor

For PX class CT, Ek (rated knee point e.m.f) is generally determined as


follows:

Kx: Demensioning factor

For the CTs applied to protection for110kV voltage level and below system,
the CT should be selected based on system steady fault state condition. P
class CT is always applied.

5.4.3 Accuracy class

The CT accuracy class should guarantee that the protection relay applied is
able to operate correctly even at a very sensitive setting, e.g. for a sensitive
residual overcurrent protection. Generally, the current transformer should
have an accuracy class, which have an current error at rated primary current,
that is less than 1% (e.g. class 5P).

If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the
actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.

5.4.4 Ratio of CT

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data
like e.g. maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the
protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to
be detected with the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is
different for different functions and settable normally. So each function should
be checked separately.

322
Chapter 24 Appendix

5.4.5 Rated secondary current

There are 2 standard rated secondary currents, 1A or 5A. Generally, 1 A


should be preferred, particularly in HV and EHV stations, to reduce the
burden of the CT secondary circuit. Because 5A rated CTs, i.e. I2R is 25x
compared to only 1x for a 1A CT. However, in some cases to reduce the CT
secondary circuit open voltage, 5A can be applied.

5.4.6 Secondary burden

Too high flux will result in CT saturation. The secondary e.m.f is directly
proportional to linked flux. To feed rated secondary current, CT need to
generate enough secondary e.m.f to feed the secondary burden.
Consequently, Higher secondary burden, need Higher secondary e.m.f, and
then closer to saturation. So the actual secondary burden Rb must be less
than the rated secondary burden Rb of applied CT, presented

Rb > Rb

The CT actual secondary burden Rb consists of wiring loop resistance Rlead


and the actual relay burdens Zb in whole secondary circuit, which is
calculated by following equation

Rb = Rlead + Zb

The rated relay burden, Zbn, is calculated as below:

Where
Sr: the burden of IED current input channel per phase, in VA;

For earth faults, the loop includes both phase and neutral wire, normally twice
the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the neutral
current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the
point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The
most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.

In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not


the considered dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single
secondary wire always can be used in the calculation, for this case.

5.5 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements


To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able
to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin

323
Chapter 24 Appendix

to saturate.

5.5.1 Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection

For TPY CT,

Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at close-in


forward and reverse faults (A)

Ipcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)

Considering auto-reclosing operation, Eal should meet the following


requirement, at C-O-C-O duty cycle

Where

Ktd: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2


recommended

For P Class and PR class CT,

Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at close-in


forward and reverse faults (A)

Ipcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)

Esl can be verified as below:

324
Chapter 24 Appendix

Where

Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

For PX class CT,

Ek should be verified based on below equation.

Where

Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

5.5.2 Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection

For TPY CT,

Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)

Considering auto-reclosing operation, Eal should meet the following


requirement, at C-O duty cycle

Where

Ktd: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2


recommended

For P Class and PR class CT,

Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:

Where

Ipcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)

325
Chapter 24 Appendix

Esl can be verified as below:

Where

Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

For PX class CT,

Ek should be verified based on below equation.

Where

Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended

326

Potrebbero piacerti anche